JP2012106058A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine for reporting abnormality.SOLUTION: It is determined to be abnormal when a specific start detection means detects a game ball in a period when a variable winning device is in an open state, or in a period other than a period when prescribed time passes from a point of time when the variable winning device changes from an open state to a closed state. Also, control is performed to at least one advantageous state out of a state where variable display time of second identification information is shortened, a state where a prescribed display result is easily derived and displayed on a second variable display means as compared with a normal state, and a state where time for setting the variable winning device to an open state is lengthened as compared with a normal state. Then, the variable display time in control to an advantageous state is set shorter than the prescribed time.

Description

  The present invention provides a plurality of types of first identification information capable of identifying each game ball based on detection of the game ball by the specific start detection means for detecting the game ball that has passed the first start region provided in the game area. The variable display of the second identification information is performed on the basis of the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start area provided in the game area, and the first variable display means for performing the variable display and deriving and displaying the display result. And a second variable display means for deriving and displaying the game machine, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display means, the game machine shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball is won in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to a player as a prize ball. There is a gaming machine. Since the gaming machine pays out a prize ball in accordance with winning, it is necessary to have at least a payout mechanism capable of paying out a prize ball.

JP-A-5-228243

  An object of this invention is to provide the gaming machine which can alert | report abnormality.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of types of first balls that can be identified based on the detection of the game ball by the specific start detection means that detects the game ball that has passed the first start area provided in the game area. 1st variable display means for variably displaying 1 identification information and deriving and displaying the display result; and 2nd identification information variably displayed based on the game ball passing through the second starting area provided in the game area. And a second variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display means, the gaming machine shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. A variable winning device that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball does not pass through one starting area and an open state in which it can pass; and a variable winning device that is open when a predetermined display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display means Variable input to control When a specific starting detection means detects a game ball in a period other than the period during which the apparatus control means and the variable prize-winning device are in the open state, or a predetermined time elapses from the time when the variable winning device changes from the open state to the closed state First abnormality determination means for determining an abnormality, variable display time setting means for setting a variable display time for the second identification information, a state for reducing the variable display time for the second identification information, and a second state compared to the normal state. Advantageous state control means for controlling at least one advantageous state of a state in which a predetermined display result is easily derived and displayed on the variable display means, or a state in which the time during which the variable winning device is opened is made longer than the normal state; , A special variable winning device capable of changing from a state in which a game ball does not win in a specific gaming state to a state in which it is easy to win, and a special winning test for detecting a gaming ball won in the special variable winning device Means, a second abnormality determining means for determining an abnormality when a game ball is detected by the special winning detection means in a period other than the period controlled to the specific gaming state, and at least a second abnormality determining means for determining an abnormality Abnormality notification means for notifying abnormality when it is set, and the variable display time setting means sets the variable display time when it is controlled to be in an advantageous state over a predetermined time to a short time.

  According to invention of Claim 1, abnormality notification can be carried out.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko machine of the state which removed the glass door frame from the front. It is a front view which shows the front surface of a glass door frame. It is a front view which shows the front of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the truck as a movable member. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the beam as a movable member. It is the rear view seen from the back of a pachinko machine. It is a principal part perspective view which shows the state which looked at the upper part of the front frame with which the mechanism board was assembled | attached from the back side. It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is a figure which shows the front and upper surface of a hit ball supply tray (upper plate). It is a figure which shows the front and upper surface of a surplus ball | bowl tray (lower plate). It is the top view which expanded the hitting ball supply tray. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a player's hand, a ball-lending switch, and a return switch during operation of an operation part. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of an operation part. It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect of the press operation part of an operation part, and a display member. It is a figure for demonstrating the aspect in the state which the press operation part light-emitted. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the various detectors and lamps in an operation part, and the structure of an operation part. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for showing the various states of an operation part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the game frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the back surface of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control board, a relay board, a board side IC board, and a frame side IC board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the address provided to each input IC. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the format of the serial data output from the microcomputer for production control. It is a timing diagram which shows the example of the input timing of the serial data and clock signal to serial-parallel conversion IC, and the output timing of parallel data. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of each input IC. It is a timing chart which shows each detection signal of the 1st rotation detector and the 2nd rotation detector at the time of rotation operation of a rotation operation part. It is a figure which shows the rotation determination table used in order for a production control microcomputer to determine a rotation direction and rotation amount based on each detection signal of a 1st rotation detector and a 2nd rotation detector in tabular form. It is a display screen diagram showing an image displayed on the effect display device when the effect mode can be selected. It is a display screen figure which shows the image displayed on a production | presentation display apparatus when it is decided to set it as the specific kind of reach called a chance reach. It is a display screen figure which shows the image displayed on a production | presentation display apparatus when it is decided to set it as the specific kind of reach called a chance reach. It is a display screen figure which shows the image displayed on a production | presentation display apparatus when it is decided to set it as the predetermined kind of reach called character selection reach. It is a circuit diagram which shows the wiring state about the ground board | substrate, the board | substrate by the side of a card unit, and a one part board | substrate by the side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure in an earth substrate. It is a connection diagram which shows each member attached to the mechanism board with a ball striking rail, a grounding board, and a card unit. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a card unit. It is a block diagram which shows the connection relation of an interface board | substrate, a card unit, and a payout control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit structure in a power supply board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a big hit determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the format of the presentation control command transmitted as a serial data system. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transmission timing of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result specific command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a high base time table and a low base time table. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory operating process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the payout command signal etc. which are transmitted with respect to the payout control microcomputer from the game control microcomputer. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of each control signal. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of how to output a payout control signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the buffer used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of a switch process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormal winning notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows operation detection processing. It is a flowchart which shows rotation operation determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows production mode selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of the process in decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of the process in decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on a variable display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the aspect of the various error alerting | reporting performed in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an operation part failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process during alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the process table for error alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data system in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data system in alerting | reporting control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the motor control signal output as a serial data system in a game production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a structure of the process table for operation instructions, and the example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data format in an effect mode selection process and an operation time effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a serial setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows one structural example of the data storage area | region where the lamp control signal and motor control signal of an output object are set. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a serial input / output process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the condition of the display effect in a variable display apparatus, the sound effect by a speaker, and the display effect by each lamp | ramp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the condition of the display effect in a variable display apparatus, the sound effect by a speaker, and the display effect by each lamp | ramp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which multiple game machines are installed in the game store. It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the effect process at the time of operation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other display mode of a determination operation instruction | indication display and a rotation operation instruction | indication display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data format in effect mode selection process and operation time effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another display aspect of a determination operation instruction | indication display and a rotation operation instruction | indication display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another display aspect of a determination operation instruction | indication display and a rotation operation instruction | indication display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another example of the address provided to each serial-parallel conversion IC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data format in an effect mode selection process and an operation time effect process.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be other gaming machines such as a coin gaming machine and a slot machine. Any gaming machine may be used as long as it can play a predetermined game.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine with the glass door frame removed, as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the front surface of the glass door frame. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the front of the game board. FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the truck as the movable member. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the beam as the movable member.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is attached to an outer frame (not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, see the outer frame 200 shown in FIG. 6) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and to be opened and closed inside the outer frame. It is composed of a game frame 11. The game frame 11 includes a front frame 2a that can be freely opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, and a mechanism plate to which mechanical components and the like are attached (not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2; see the mechanism plate 105 shown in FIG. 6). And various parts (except game boards described later) attached to them. A glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape as shown in FIG. 2 is provided at the upper part on the front side of the front frame 2a so as to be opened and closed. The glass door frame 2 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with a circular see-through window as an opening through which a game area 7 of a game board 6 described later can be almost seen through, and a multilayer glass plate is mounted from the back surface of the circular see-through window. It is like that. FIG. 1 shows a pachinko gaming machine 1 with the glass door frame 2 as shown in FIG. 2 removed.

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided at a lower portion on the front side of the front frame 2a so as to be positioned below the glass door frame 2. In FIG. 1, the glass door frame 2 shown in FIG. 2 is attached to the upper part of the hitting ball supply tray 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the game is performed with the glass door frame 2 closed. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, an extra ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for launching the game balls are provided. Yes.

  On the back surface of the front frame 2a, there is a plastic frame that constitutes a part of the game frame 11, as shown in FIG. The plastic frame includes a mechanism plate, and components such as a power supply circuit (not shown) and a speaker 27 are attached to the mechanism plate. The plastic frame of the game frame 11 is provided with a relay board (not shown) that relays the wiring between the game frame 11 and the game board 6. Further, in the game frame 11, the game board 6 is detachably attached in such a manner that it is housed and fixed in a game board storage frame portion formed on the back side of the front frame 2a. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  On the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a prepaid card (made of a magnetic card) as a recording medium owned by the player is received (inserted into the insertion slot), and is owned by the player specified by the recording information of the prepaid card A prepaid card unit (hereinafter referred to as a recording medium processing device) that performs processing for lending (lending) a game ball as a rental ball to a player based on the use of the remaining amount (also referred to as a balance) as the game value of Simply called “card unit”) is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown in FIG. 1 and shown in FIG. 6 and the like). Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game balls, which are the game media stored in the hit ball supply tray 3, are shot and fired, and the game balls are driven into the game area 7 formed on the game board 6, and A predetermined game as described is performed. When a game ball is received in a winning area provided in the gaming area 7 in the game and a winning occurs, a payout condition is established, and the prize is a prize game medium as a prize based on the establishment of the payout condition. Prize balls (game balls) are paid out.

  Near the center of the game area 7, there is provided a variable display device (also referred to as an effect display device or an image display device) 9 including a plurality of variable display portions each displaying a decorative pattern for effect display (variable display). Yes. The variable display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The variable display device 9 performs a variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative (designation) symbol during the special symbol variable display period by the special symbol indicator 8. The variable display device 9 that performs variable display of decorative symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  Below the variable display device 9, there is provided a special symbol display device (special symbol display device) 8 for variably displaying special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. In this embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of displaying a numerical value of, for example, 00 to 99 in a variable manner. The special symbol display 8 is not limited to displaying a two-digit number, but may be configured to display a variable number of digits such as 0 to 9 in a variable manner. In addition, the variable display device 9 changes the decorative symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified during the variable symbol display period of the special symbols by the special symbol indicator 8 for decoration (for production). Display.

  On the right side of the special symbol display 8 is a special symbol hold composed of four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the start winning openings 13, 14, that is, the number of hold memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). A storage indicator 18 is provided. Every time there is an effective start prize, the display color of one display is changed. Then, every time the variable display of the special symbol display 8 is started, the display color of one display is restored. In the display area of the variable display device 9, a special symbol reserved storage display area including four display areas for displaying the number of reserved memories may be provided. Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is 4, but the upper limit value may be a larger value. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the variable display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a second starting winning opening (second starting opening) through which a game ball can be won based on the operation of the pair of left and right movable pieces. A variable winning ball apparatus 15 having 14 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened when the movable piece is opened by bringing the solenoid 16 into an excited state. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed when the movable piece is closed by putting the solenoid 16 in a demagnetized state. In a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the variable display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the variable display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail is arranged densely around 13 or the nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is difficult for the game balls to guide to the first starting winning opening 13, It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  On the right side of the variable display device 9, a trolley 151 as a movable member used for a game effect is provided. In the game effect, the truck 151 can produce an effect of jumping from the right side of the variable display device 9 to the left side as shown in FIG. 4 according to the control of the effect control means.

  Further, on the upper and right sides of the variable display device 9, a beam 152 is provided as a movable member used for a game effect. As shown in FIG. 5, the beam 152 can perform an effect that collapses from the upper part and the right side of the variable display device 9 according to the control of the effect control means in the game effect.

  Further, at the lower part of the variable display device 9, a solenoid 21 is used in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player that occurs when the special display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the special symbol display 8. A special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that is opened is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 has an opening / closing plate 20a that opens and closes a large winning opening as a winning area in which a game ball can win when opened, and an open state (open state) advantageous to the player, and a game It is controlled to one of the closed states that is disadvantageous to the person. In the specific game state (big hit game state), the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to be in the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the big prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state. The winning ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 1, the member which comprises the hit ball supply tray 3 is provided with the operation part 81 as an operation means which can be operated by the player. The detailed configuration and operation of the operation unit 81 will be described later (see FIGS. 11 to 17 and the like).

  Referring to FIG. 1, when a game ball wins a gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, a display variation display (variable display) of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the left and right lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on) are turned on alternately to perform variable display. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. At the lower part of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls entered into the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a prize at the gate 32, the normal symbol holding storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  The game board 6 is provided with a plurality of winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39. The winning holes 29, 30, 33, and 39 for the game balls are awarded to the winning port switches 29a and 30a, respectively. , 33a, 39a. Each winning opening 29, 30, 33, 39 constitutes a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game balls and allowing winning. The start winning ports 13 and 14 and the big winning port also constitute a winning area that accepts game balls and allows winning. In addition, the game balls won in the respective winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 may be detected by one switch.

  A decoration member 154 is attached to the central portion of the game area 7 so as to surround the variable display device 9, and a decoration lamp (for center decoration) that is lit or flashed during the game is provided above the decoration member 154. Lamp). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, six LEDs 125a to 125f are provided as center decoration lamps. The decoration member 154 is provided with a decorative lamp (stage lamp) that is lit or flashed during the game so as to surround the variable display device 9. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, six LEDs 126a to 126f are provided as stage lamps.

  Further, at the lower part of the game area 7, there is an out port 26 for absorbing game balls that have not won a prize. Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7.

  Referring to FIG. 2, a top frame lamp, a left frame lamp, and a right frame lamp are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure in the game area 7. The top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, the right frame lamp, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, twelve LEDs 281a to 281l are provided as ceiling lamps. In addition, six LEDs 282a to 282f are provided as left frame lamps. In addition, six LEDs 283a to 283f are provided as right frame lamps. Referring to FIG. 1, as the decorative LEDs around the structure, one LED 127 a is provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 15, and two LEDs 127 b and 127 c are provided around the special variable winning ball apparatus 20. Further, the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 includes eight single-color LEDs (first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h shown in FIG. 16 and the like) and one multi-color LED (FIG. 16 and the like). The operation unit center lamp 82A) is provided, and the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 is provided with four single color LEDs (the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l shown in FIG. 16 and the like). ing.

  The game balls launched from the hit ball launching device enter the game area 7 through the hit ball rails (launch rail (not shown in FIG. 1), outer rail 441, inner rail 442), and then descend the game area 7. come. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, or when a game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, the variation of the design If the display can be started, the special symbol on the special symbol display unit 8 starts the variable display (variation), and the variable display device 9 starts the variable symbol display (variation). If the symbol display cannot be started, the number of reserved memories is increased by one.

  The special symbol variation display on the special symbol display 8 and the decorative symbol variation display on the variable display device 9 are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage is a jackpot symbol (a jackpot display result as a specific display result), the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the special winning opening is opened until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins.

  When the game ball wins the gate 32, the normal symbol display unit 10 is in a state where the normal symbol is variably displayed. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. Further, in the probability variation state, the probability that the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Further, in the short time state (the game state in which the special symbol variation display time is shortened), the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 may be increased.

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine as seen from the back. In FIG. 6, the card unit 50 is also shown.

  As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a variable display control unit 49 including an effect control board 80 on which an effect control microcomputer for controlling the variable display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer, etc. A game control board (main board) 31 on which is mounted, an audio output board 70, an LED driver board (not shown), and a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control is mounted. A board is installed.

  Furthermore, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply board 910 and a touch sensor board (also referred to as a launch control board) 91A on which power supply circuits for creating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V, and DC5V are provided. It has been. The power supply board 910 partially overlaps the payout control board 37, but the exposed portion exposed so as not to overlap the payout control board 37 so as to be visible from the outside has the main board 31 and each electric component in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Electric power for executing or shutting off power supply to the control boards (the effect control board 80 and the payout control board 37) and the electric parts (parts that operate when power is supplied) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 A power switch is provided as supply permitting means. Furthermore, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch in the exposed portion (inside the substrate).

  An electrical component control means including an electrical component control microcomputer is mounted on the electrical component control board. The electrical component control means is an electrical component (game device: ball payout device 97, variable display device 9, LED) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. Etc., and a speaker 27 etc. are controlled. Hereinafter, description may be made by including the main board 31 in the electric component control board. In that case, the electrical component control means mounted on the electrical component control board includes a game control means and means for controlling the electrical components provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal from the game control means and the like. Each of them. A substrate on which a microcomputer other than the main substrate 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub-substrate.

  On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a terminal board 159 having terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed above. The terminal board 159 includes at least a ball break terminal for introducing the output of the ball break detection switch 167 and outputting it externally, a prize ball terminal for outputting award ball information (prize ball number signal), and a ball. A ball lending terminal for externally outputting lending information (ball lending number signal) is provided. Near the center, an information terminal board (information output board) 34 having terminals for outputting various information from the main board 31 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed.

  The game balls stored in the ball tank 38 capable of storing the balls supplied from the gaming machine installation island (see FIG. 116) pass through the tank rail and pass through the curve cage to the ball payout device 97 covered with the case cover 731. It reaches. Above the ball payout device 97, a ball break switch 197 is provided as a game medium break detection means for detecting that there is no ball in the passage. When the ball break switch 197 detects a ball break, the payout operation of the ball payout device 97 stops. The ball break switch 197 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the ball break detection switch 167 for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the ball tank 38 is also an upstream portion (in the ball tank 38) of the guide rail. (Proximate part). When the ball break detection switch 167 detects a shortage of game balls, the game balls are replenished to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the replenishment mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a game ball as a prize based on a winning prize or a game ball based on a ball lending request is paid out from the ball payout device 97, the game ball is guided to the hitting ball supply tray 3 through the guide rod 430. When a large number of balls are dispensed and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball guiding path. When the game ball is further paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses a full tank switch (not shown) as a storage state detection means, and the full tank switch as a storage state detection means is turned on. In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device 97 is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped. In the state where the full tank switch is turned on, the operation of the ball dispensing device 97 and the driving of the hitting ball launching device do not necessarily have to be stopped, or may be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed since the turning on.

  Next, the mounting structure of the ball tank 38 and the speaker 27 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a main part showing a state in which the upper part of the front frame to which the mechanism plate is assembled is viewed from the back side, and FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG.

  On the left and right sides of the upper part of the back surface of the front frame 2a, a speaker mounting hole 115 is formed, and a bulging portion 121 having an open front surface is formed so as to bulge toward the back side. A vertical surface 122 to be described later is formed on the back surface side of the bulging portion 121, and a part of the rear surface of the speaker unit 27 a fitted from the front surface side into the speaker mounting hole 115 is the front surface side of the vertical surface 122. The contact is regulated at. Further, an opening 123 (see FIG. 8) is formed on the side of the vertical surface 122 so that the speaker mounting hole 115 is opened to the back side, and a part of the rear portion of the speaker unit 27a is opened. It protrudes toward the back side from the vertical surface 122 through 123 (see FIG. 8).

  A positioning piece (not shown) that can be fitted in a positioning groove 27b that is formed on the upper surface of the speaker unit 27a and faces in the up-and-down direction is provided on the upper surface of the inner surface of the bulging portion 121. The backlash of the speaker unit 27a is prevented.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the ball tank 38 is attached to the upper back of the mechanism plate 105 by screws from the back side. The spherical tank 38 is formed of a substantially rectangular box in plan view having a predetermined depth with an upper surface opened, and is formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in plan view as shown in FIG. 8, and the front frame 2a. A notch recess 38a that opens forward and laterally is formed inwardly at the right corner (the left corner in the figure) of the front plate 38b that faces the front. In addition, an outlet 38c communicating with the tank rail constituting the supply ball guiding passage 160 is formed on the side of the bottom surface, and the bottom surface is disposed so as to be inclined downward toward the outlet 38c.

  On the other hand, a mechanism plate notch recess 720a similar to the ball tank 38 is formed inwardly at the right corner of the ball plate mounting portion 720 of the mechanism plate 105. The front side surface of the mechanism plate notch recess 720a abuts on the vertical surface 122 and the inner side surface 124, and the rear side surface abuts on the front side surface (outer surface) of the notch recess 38a.

  In this way, a part of the right speaker unit 27a can be accommodated in the notch recess 38a formed at the corner of the front plate 38b facing the back of the front frame 2a in the ball tank 38. That is, since the portion other than the formation portion of the notch recess 38a in the front side plate 38b of the ball tank 38 is disposed in front of the rear surface of the speaker unit 27a disposed on the left and right, the speaker 27 is increased in size and the speaker unit. Even if the front and rear width of 27a is long and may interfere with the side of the sphere tank 38, the sphere tank does not reduce the amount of stored spheres and does not protrude greatly to the back side of the front frame 2a. 38 can be disposed, and thereby interference with various devices provided in the gaming machine installation island (not shown) can be avoided.

  When the speaker units 27a and 27a are spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides of the front frame 2a, the speaker units 27a and 27a can be disposed at the same height as the positions where the speaker units 27a and 27a are disposed. Not only can the space between the units 27a and 27a be used to efficiently form a storage space for the spheres, but also the rear side of the speaker units 27a and 27a without reducing the overall width in the left-right direction. Since a storage space can be formed, the amount of stored spheres is not significantly reduced.

  In other words, the ball tank 38 has a notch recess 38a formed at the corner of the front side plate 38b, so that the storage area of the sphere is the first front / back width L1 formed between the left and right speaker units 27a, 27a. It is comprised from the storage area | region and the 2nd storage area | region which has the front-back width L2 shorter than L1 formed in the back side of the notch recessed part 38a.

  Further, the outer surface of the notch recess 38a of the ball tank 38 does not directly contact the outer surface of the main body of the speaker unit 27a protruding to the back side of the front frame 2a, but the vertical surface 122 that directly contacts the outer surface of the main body of the speaker unit 27a. In addition, since the contact is made indirectly through the main body plate (ball tank mounting portion 720) of the mechanism plate 105 that is in contact with the vertical surface 122, the vibration generated when the speaker 27 outputs sound is affected by the ball tank. Since the game balls stored in the ball tank 38 are leveled and stored without unevenness due to this vibration, the occurrence of ball clogging or the like can be effectively prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the front side surfaces (outer surfaces) of the left and right cutout recesses 38a, 38a of the ball tank 38 are provided in contact with the rear surface of the ball tank mounting portion 720 of the mechanism plate 105. As long as it is provided in the state of being close to a part of the back surface or side surface of the unit 27a, it may not necessarily be provided in direct contact, or the back surface or side surface of the ball tank mounting portion 720 or the speaker unit 27a. It may be arranged in a state of being separated from. Further, the speaker unit 27a may be provided in direct contact with at least a part of the back surface or side surface.

  Further, when the speaker 27 and the speaker unit 27a are enlarged and attached so as to swell greatly from the back side of the front frame 2a toward the back side, the left and right width of the ball tank 38 is set between the left and right speaker units 27a and 27a. If the length is short enough to fit, the storage amount of the sphere is limited. However, as described above, a concave portion 38a that is recessed inward is formed in a part of the sphere tank 38, and a part of the speaker unit 27a is formed in the concave portion 38a. By attaching the ball tank 38 in the fitted state, it is not necessary to shorten the entire left and right width, so that not only can the storage amount be reduced, but also the ball tank 38 can be more than the left and right speaker units 27a and 27a. The pachinko machine 1 does not have to protrude greatly on the back side, and the front-rear width of the pachinko machine 1 does not become large, so that the space can be arranged efficiently.

  Next, the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) and the surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 9 is a view showing a front surface and an upper surface of a hit ball supply tray (upper plate). As shown in FIG. 9, the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided with six LEDs 882a to 882f as upper plate lamps. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, two LEDs 882a and 882b are provided on the left side of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, two LEDs 882c and 882d are provided on the front, and two LEDs 882e are provided on the right side. , 882f. In this embodiment, the front of the gaming machine refers to the surface on the side facing the player when the player is playing (the side on which the player is viewing). Further, the side surface of the gaming machine refers to a surface on the side orthogonal to the player's line-of-sight direction when the player is playing a game. In this case, the left side as viewed from the player is referred to as the left side, and the right side as viewed from the player is referred to as the right side. These LEDs 882a to 882f are mounted on the respective substrates 331, 332, 333, and 334 provided on the back surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a lens cover 821 having an inverted “<” shape is attached to the left side surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, and when the LEDs 882a and 882b are lit or blinking, Light is diffused by the cover 821, and the entire lens cover 821 appears to shine. Specifically, the lens cover 821 includes a protective lens cover and a light diffusion lens cover formed in a knurled shape or a cross-cut shape and having a jagged back surface, and the LEDs 882a and 882b. When is turned on or blinks, the light is diffused by the light diffusing lens cover so that the entire lens cover 821 can be seen to shine. The lens cover for light diffusion is colored with a predetermined color (for example, blue), and when the LEDs 882a and 882b are turned on or blinking, the entire lens cover 821 appears to shine in the predetermined color (for example, blue). In addition, by using a transparent lens cover 821 and using full-color LEDs as the LEDs 882a and 882b and changing the emission color of the LEDs 882a and 882b, the entire lens cover 821 can be seen to shine in a predetermined color (for example, blue). May be. It should be noted that the inner LED 882a, 882b is also used by using lens parts (for example, a logo mark or the like) also on the inner triangular portion 821A of the lens cover 821 on the left side surface of the hitting ball supply tray (top plate) 3. You may make it light-emit and see by (You may provide LED different from LED882a, 882b.). Alternatively, an opaque synthetic resin part may be used as the triangular portion 821A inside the lens cover 821 on the left side surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a belt-shaped lens cover 822 is attached to the front surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, and when the LEDs 882c and 882d are turned on or blinking, light is emitted from the lens cover 822. When diffused, the entire lens cover 822 appears to shine. Specifically, the lens cover 822 includes a protective lens cover and a light diffusion lens cover that is formed in a knurled shape or a cross-cut shape and has a jagged back surface, and the LEDs 882c and 882d. When is turned on or blinks, the light is diffused by the light diffusing lens cover, and the entire lens cover 822 can be seen to shine. The lens cover for light diffusion is colored with a predetermined color (for example, blue), and when the LEDs 882c and 882d are turned on or blinking, the entire lens cover 822 appears to shine in the predetermined color (for example, blue). The lens cover 822 is made of a transparent material (colorless and transparent member), the full-color LED is used as the LEDs 882c and 882d, and the emission color of the LEDs 882c and 882d is changed, so that the entire lens cover 822 has a predetermined color ( For example, it may appear to shine blue).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a "-"-shaped lens cover 823 is attached to the right side surface of the hitting ball supply tray (top plate) 3, and when the LEDs 882e and 882f are lit or blinking, the lens cover At 823, the light is diffused and the entire lens cover 823 appears to shine. Specifically, the lens cover 823 includes a protective lens cover and a light diffusion lens cover formed in a knurled shape or a cross-cut shape and having a jagged back surface, and the LEDs 882e and 882f. When is turned on or blinks, the light is diffused by the light diffusing lens cover, and the entire lens cover 823 can be seen to shine. The lens cover for light diffusion is colored in a predetermined color (for example, blue), and the entire lens cover 823 appears to shine in the predetermined color (for example, blue) when the LEDs 882e and 882f are turned on or blinking. In addition, by using a transparent lens cover 823 and using full-color LEDs as the LEDs 882e and 882f and changing the emission color of the LEDs 882e and 882f, the entire lens cover 823 appears to shine in a predetermined color (for example, blue). May be. It should be noted that the inner LED 882e, 882f is also used by using lens parts (for example, a logo mark or the like) on the triangular portion 823A inside the lens cover 823 on the right side surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. The LED may be made to appear to emit light (an LED other than the LEDs 882e and 882f may be provided). Alternatively, an opaque synthetic resin component may be used as the triangular portion 823A inside the lens cover 823 on the right side surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3.

  The two lens covers 821 and 823 of the lens covers of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 and the four LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f of the LEDs of the upper tray lamp are respectively a hitting ball supply tray ( On the left side and the right side of the upper plate 3), it is provided at a position that is difficult for a player who is playing the game to view.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a front surface and an upper surface of a surplus ball tray (lower plate). As shown in FIG. 10, six LEDs 884 a to 884 f are provided on the surplus ball tray (lower pan) 4 as lower pan lamps. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, six LEDs 884 a to 884 f are provided on the peripheral portion of the surplus ball tray (lower pan) 4 (in this example, the upper surface of the surplus ball tray (lower pan) 4). ing. These LEDs 884 a to 884 f are mounted on a substrate 431 provided on the back surface of the surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, a “U” -shaped lens cover 841 is attached to the upper surface of the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4, and when the LEDs 884 a to 884 f are lit or blinking, the lens cover 841 is mounted. The light is diffused and the entire lens cover 841 appears to shine. Specifically, the lens cover 841 includes a protective lens cover and a light diffusion lens cover formed in a knurled shape or a cross-cut shape and having a jagged back surface, and the LEDs 884a to 884f. When is turned on or blinks, the light is diffused by the light diffusing lens cover so that the entire lens cover 841 can be seen to shine. The lens cover for light diffusion is colored with a predetermined color (for example, blue), and the LEDs 884a to 884f are turned on or blinking, so that the entire lens cover 841 appears to shine in the predetermined color (for example, blue). In addition, by using a transparent lens cover 841 and using full-color LEDs as the LEDs 884a to 884f and changing the emission color of the LEDs 884a to 884f, the entire lens cover 841 can be seen to shine in a predetermined color (for example, blue). May be.

  In this embodiment, lighting or blinking control according to the variation pattern is performed as the LED control of each lamp including the upper pan lamp and the lower pan lamp according to the normal game effect. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the lighting or blinking control of the LED of each lamp is performed based on the process data corresponding to the variation pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 3 is attached to the game frame 11 via a hinge portion 312 so as to be rotatable. Further, an opening lever 317 for opening the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided on the right side surface opposite to the side where the hinge portion 312 is provided. The engagement state with the frame is released, and the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is rotatable about the hinge portion 312. Further, the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided with a tray portion 350 for storing game balls, and when a payout process or a ball lending process is performed, the game balls are received from the game ball inlet 311. The game ball is stored in the dish portion 350. Further, the dish part 350 is inclined so as to become lower in the direction from the left side surface to the right side surface, and the game balls stored in the dish part 350 are guided from the left side surface to the right side surface, and pass through the passage 350A. It is guided to the hitting position through. Further, an upper plate slide lever 313 is provided on the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. The bottom of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided with a through-hole for transferring the game balls accumulated in the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 to the surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4. By sliding 313, the through hole at the bottom of the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 are moved to the surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4 side. Can flow in. Further, the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is provided with a ball lending switch 91 for performing a lending request operation and a return switch 92 for performing a returning operation of a prepaid card inserted into the card unit. Yes. Note that the return switch is not limited to a prepaid card return operation. For example, if the game machine performs a ball lending process by inserting a coin-shaped recording medium (for example, an IC coin) into a card unit, a return switch You may make it return a coin by operating 92. Further, the hitting ball supply tray (top plate) 3 is provided with a frequency display LED 93 for displaying the remaining frequency of the prepaid card or the like (the frequency that can be lent out, that is, the amount of value recorded on the recording medium). Yes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 is attached to the game frame 11 so as to be rotatable via a hinge portion 401. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 is provided with a tray portion 450 for storing game balls. When the upper tray slide lever 313 is operated, it flows from the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 3. The game balls and the game balls that have overflowed and flowed in when the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is full are stored. In this case, when the upper plate slide lever 313 is operated, or when the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 becomes full, the game balls from the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3 are injected through the inlet 403 and the Stored in the portion 450. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 is provided with a lower tray slide lever 402. At the bottom of the extra ball tray (lower plate) 4, a through-hole is provided for transferring the game balls accumulated in the extra ball tray (lower plate) 4 to a ball box (box for containing game balls). By sliding the plate slide lever 402, the through-hole at the bottom of the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 can flow into the ball box. it can.

  Next, a detailed configuration and operation of the operation unit 81 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 11 is an enlarged plan view of the hit ball supply tray. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the player's hand and the ball rental switch and the return switch during operation of the operation unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation unit. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining modes of the pressing operation unit and the display member of the operation unit. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a state in which the pressing operation unit emits light. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between various detectors and lamps in the operation unit and the structure of the operation unit. FIG. 17 is a longitudinal sectional view for illustrating various states of the operation unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the member constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided with an operation portion 81 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation unit 81 is a push button switch (jog switch) that allows a player to perform a pressing operation in a direction selected from a plurality of predetermined directions (four directions) such as front, rear, left, and right when viewed from the player. A plurality of operation units including a pressing operation unit 811 having a circular shape in a plan view and a rotation operation unit 812 including a dial (jog dial) that can be rotated around the pressing operation unit 811 and can be rotated. including. In addition to the four directions of front, back, left and right, the pressing operation unit 811 can also be pressed downward as viewed from the player. In the pressing operation unit 811, the player faces the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the front, rear, left, and right four directions. The player can perform a direction selection operation for selectively pressing one of the directions and a determination operation for pressing the entire pressing operation unit 811 downward in addition to the direction selection operation.

  In the pressing operation unit 811, a portion operated when performing an operation of selecting the front direction (a portion on the side facing the player toward the pressing operation unit 811) is referred to as a front direction portion. In the pressing operation unit 811, a portion operated when performing an operation of selecting the backward direction (a portion on the near side of the player toward the pressing operation unit 811) is referred to as a backward direction portion. In the pressing operation portion 811, a portion operated when performing an operation of selecting the left direction (a portion on the left side of the player facing the pressing operation portion 811) is referred to as a left direction portion. In the pressing operation unit 811, a portion (a portion on the right side of the player facing the pressing operation unit 811) operated when performing an operation of selecting the right direction is referred to as a right direction unit.

  In addition, the rotation operation unit 812 allows the player to arbitrarily perform a left rotation operation that rotates counterclockwise and a right rotation operation that rotates clockwise.

  In addition to the operation unit 811, the member constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 receives a ball lending switch 91 operated when borrowing a game ball via the card unit 50 described above, and when a prepaid card is returned. An operation means such as a return switch 92 is provided.

  FIG. 11 also shows a cross-sectional view of the ball lending switch 91. As shown in FIG. 11, the ball lending switch 91 is disposed on the same surface as the surface on which the operation unit 81 of the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided. Further, as shown in the sectional view in FIG. 11, the ball lending switch 91 is disposed at a position recessed from the surface on which the operation unit 81 of the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided in a state where it is not pressed by the player. Has been. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where the ball lending switch 91 is accidentally pressed when the operation unit 81 is operated. Similarly to the ball lending switch 91, the return switch 92 is also arranged at a position recessed from the surface on which the operation unit 81 of the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the return switch 92 is accidentally pressed when the operation unit 81 is operated.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the player's hand and the ball rental switch 91 and the return switch 92 during the operation of the operation unit 81. FIG. 12A shows a state where the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 is operated using the left hand. 12B and 12C show a state in which the rotation operation unit 812 is operated using the right hand. For example, as shown in FIG. 12C, when the rotation operation unit 812 is operated using the right hand, the position of the right hand is unconscious of the player and the positions of the ball rental switch 91 and the return switch 92. There may be an overlapping state. In this case, if the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 are arranged so as to protrude from the surface on which the operation unit 81 of the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided, the right hand is the ball lending switch. 91 or the return switch 92 may be touched, and the ball lending switch 91 or the return switch 92 may be accidentally pressed. In this embodiment, since the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92 are arranged so as to be recessed from the surface on which the operation unit 81 of the hit ball supply tray 3 is provided, the operation of the operation unit 81 This prevents a situation where a hand touches the ball lending switch 91 or the return switch 92 by mistake.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation unit 81. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining modes of the pressing operation unit 811 and the display member 811A of the operation unit 81. FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a state in which the pressing operation unit 811 emits light. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between various detectors and lamps in the operation unit 81 and the structure of the operation unit 81. FIG. 17 is a longitudinal sectional view for illustrating various states of the operation unit.

  In FIG. 13, (a) shows an exploded perspective view of the operation unit 81, and (b) shows a rear view of the cover plate 815 included in the operation unit 81 (however, the configuration of the protrusion 8150 on the back surface is clarified). Therefore, the fixing portion 815a is not shown in the drawing, and (c) is a side view of the cover plate 815 (however, the fixing portion 815a is not shown in order to clarify the configuration of the protruding portion 8150 on the back surface). Is omitted). In FIG. 14, (a) shows the mode of the pressing operation unit 811, and (b) shows the mode of the display member 811 </ b> A inside the operation unit 81. In FIG. 15, (a) shows the light emission state when the operation unit center lamp (multi-color LED) 82A blinks red, and (b) shows the light emission state when the operation unit center lamp 82A lights blue. It is shown. In FIG. 16, (a) shows a plan view of the operation unit 81 showing the arrangement of various detectors and various lamps, (b) shows a side view of the operation unit 81, and (c) shows (a A-A cross-sectional view of FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 13, the operation unit 81 includes a pressing member 811a, a display member 811A, a rotation member 812a, a button housing 813, a button spring 814, a cover plate 815, a dial base 816, a button base 817, and an operation unit substrate 818. Including. The pressing operation unit 811 is mainly configured by components such as a pressing member 811a, a display member 811A, a button housing 813, a button spring 814, a button base 817, and an operation unit substrate 818. The rotation operation unit 812 is mainly configured by components such as a rotation member 812a, a cover plate 815, and a dial base 816.

  The pressing member 811a is a resin-made semitransparent circular button-shaped member. The display member 811A is a resin-made translucent member, and is formed in a sheet shape with a constant thickness and a circular shape slightly smaller than the inner peripheral size of the pressing member 811a.

  The display member 811A has a plurality of types of character strings printed in different colors on the lower surface of a plate formed of a resin member such as an acrylic material. As shown in FIG. 14B, the display member 811A has three types of paints 811b to 811d printed on the lower surface of a resin member such as an acrylic material. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14B, the display member 811A displays a red character string (for example, “Press!”) Displayed when the operation unit center lamp 82A emits red light. Column) is printed, and a blue character string (for example, a character string such as “Turn !!”) is printed when the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light. The red character string is mainly printed by a red paint 811b that transmits red light and blocks blue light as a paint that matches the wavelength when the operation unit center lamp 82A that is a multi-color LED emits red light. ing. The blue character string is mainly printed by a blue paint 811c that transmits blue light and blocks red light as a paint that matches the wavelength when the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light. Further, a blank portion where neither a red character string nor a blue character string is printed is printed with a black paint 811d as a light-shielding color paint that does not transmit light (at least red light and blue light).

  In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the display member 811A shows a case where the red character string and the blue character string are printed so as not to have an overlapping portion. The columns and the blue character strings may be printed so as to overlap each other. In this case, the overlapping portion of the red character string and the blue character string is a mixed color of red light and blue light and a purple paint as a mixed color paint that transmits red light and blue light. It may be printed. In this embodiment, a case where a red character string and a blue character string are printed on the display member 811A is shown. However, the display member 811A is not limited to a character string. It may be printed.

  The button housing 813 is a member in which a pressing member 811a is fitted in the upper part and operates in the front / rear / left / right direction and the upper / lower direction in accordance with the operation of the pressing operation part 811. Four protrusions 813a necessary for detecting which of the directions is operated are provided. In addition, in order to cause the outer periphery of the button housing 813 to emit light in four directions (front direction, rear direction, right direction, and left direction) that the player should operate in the pressing operation unit 811. In the operation portion 81, four light guide portions 813b that guide light from below to above are formed. One end of a button spring 814 made of a coil spring is attached to the lower surface side of the button housing 813.

  The button base 817 is a resin member to which the pressing member 811a, the button housing 813, the rotating member 812a, the button spring 814, the cover plate 815, and the dial base 816 are attached at the top, and the operation unit substrate 818 is attached to the bottom. . In the button base 817, a cylindrical wall portion 817a having a shape capable of receiving the button housing 813 in the internal space is formed in the upper portion. In the button base 817, a plurality of claw portions 817b for attaching the operation portion 81 to an attachment portion provided in the hit ball supply tray 3 are formed.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the cover plate 815 is a metal member formed in an annular shape, and the button housing 813 is inserted through the inner periphery thereof. As shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C, on the lower surface side of the annular portion of the cover plate 815, a click feeling (clicking, clicking sound) is made to divide the rotation operation for every predetermined rotation amount. There is provided a protrusion 8150 in which a plurality of (two) protrusions 8151 for generating a sense of operation) are formed. The protruding portion 8150 has a protrusion 8151 that is formed by bending a part of the member at the intermediate portion of the leaf spring-like member, and the position of the protrusion 8151 is swung by the elastic force of the leaf spring-like member ( In this example, it has a shape that can be moved up and down). Further, as shown in FIG. 13A, four fixing portions 815 a for fixing the cover plate 815 to the upper part of the dial base 816 are provided on four sides of the cover plate 815.

  The dial base 816 is an annular resin member that rotates in accordance with the operation of the rotation operation unit 812, and has a cylindrical wall portion 816c into which the rotation member 812a is fitted. A button housing 813 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the dial base 816. Further, on the outer periphery of the dial base 816, there is provided a click feeling portion 816b in which a plurality of concave and convex portions for continuously generating a click feeling in relation to the protrusion 8151 of the cover plate 815 are continuously formed. . Further, on the lower surface side of the dial base 816, a rotation detection wall portion 816a for detecting the rotation of the rotation operation portion 812 is provided in a form of being arranged in an annular shape (concentric circle shape) at a predetermined interval.

  Such a dial base 816 is slidably contacted with the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical wall portion 817a of the button base 817, and is inserted through the cylindrical wall portion 817a of the button base 817 so as to be rotatable along the outer peripheral surface. In this manner, the button base 817 is fitted. The cover plate 815 fixes the fixing portion 815a to the fixing portion 817c (see FIG. 16B) provided on the button base 817 in a state where the cylindrical wall portion 816c of the dial base 816 is pressed from above. Is attached to the button base 817. In such a state, a part of the cylindrical wall portion 816 c of the dial base 816 protrudes upward from the inner peripheral side of the cover plate 815. By attaching the rotating member 812a to the protruding cylindrical wall portion 816c, the dial base 816 is interlocked with the rotating operation of the rotating operation portion 812. The protrusion 8151 of the protrusion 8150 on the lower surface side of the cover plate 815 is urged toward the uneven part continuously formed on the dial base 816 by the elastic force of the protrusion 8150. In such a case, the protrusion 8151 of the protrusion 8150 on the lower surface side of the cover plate 815 enters and exits the uneven portion formed continuously on the dial base 816, so that the rotation operation portion 812 is moved at a predetermined angle such as 15 degrees. A click feeling can be generated each time a predetermined rotation amount is rotated.

  For example, the concave portion of the concavo-convex portion continuously formed on the dial base 816 is guided so that when the projection on the lower surface side of the cover plate 815 comes into contact, the projection slides downward and enters the bottom portion of the convex portion. It is comprised in the shape which forms the slope which can do. Therefore, in response to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812, the projection 8151 moves from a certain concave portion to the vertex of the next convex portion, and when the projection 8151 enters the next concave portion beyond the vertex of the convex portion, Thereafter, even if no operating force is applied, the protrusion 8151 is urged by the elastic force of the member of the protrusion 8150, and slides down the slope to enter the bottom of the next protrusion. Therefore, when the rotation operation portion 812 is rotated, when the projection 8151 passes through the apex of the convex portion between the concave portions when the operation is performed for one click from one concave portion to the next concave portion, the protrusion is required unless it is rotated in the opposite direction. Since 8151 is guided to the bottom of the next concave portion, it is possible to determine that an operation for one click has been performed at the timing when the projection 8151 passes through the apex of the convex portion. By performing such an operation according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812, a click feeling is generated for each predetermined rotation amount.

  For the button housing 813 to which the pressing member 811a and the button spring 814 are attached, the other end of the button spring 814 is a button spring attaching portion 817c provided on the bottom surface inside the cylindrical wall portion 817a of the button base 817 (FIG. 16B). ))). As shown in FIG. 17A or 17C, after the pressing operation portion 811 is pressed, the pressing operation is performed as shown in FIG. 17B based on the expansion / contraction force of the button spring 814. The subsequent pressing member 811a is returned to the original position.

  An operation unit substrate 818 is attached to the lower surface of the button base 817 with screws. As shown in FIG. 16A, the operation unit substrate 818 is a substrate that is formed in a disc shape and on which various electrical components are mounted. On the upper surface side of the operation unit substrate 818, a first press detector 81a, a second press detector 81b, a third press detector 81c, a fourth press detector 81d, a first rotation detector 81e, and a second rotation detector 81f, 1st press operation part lamp 82a, 2nd press operation part lamp 82b, 3rd press operation part lamp 82c, 4th press operation part lamp 82d, 5th press operation part lamp 82e, 6th press operation part lamp 82f, A seventh pressing operation unit lamp 82g, an eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h, and an operation unit center lamp 82A are provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, the rotation operation unit 812 includes a first rotation operation unit lamp 82i, a second rotation operation unit lamp 82j, a third rotation operation unit lamp 82k, and a fourth rotation operation. A partial lamp 82l is also provided.

  The first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d are four-direction direction selection operation and determination operation by the press operation unit 811 as described above. , And is arranged at a predetermined interval on a concentric circle with the central portion of the operation unit substrate 818 as the center. Each pressing operation device is composed of a photosensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and as shown in FIG. 17A or FIG. It is detected that the pressing operation unit 811 has been operated based on the fact that the light is interrupted. More specifically, the relationship between the four protrusions 813a of the button housing 813 and each of the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d. Is as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 17 (a), when the left direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is pressed, the protruding portion that exists immediately below the left direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is the second pressing portion of the protruding portion 813a. Based on entering the inside of the detector 81b, it is detected that the left direction portion has been pressed. In addition, when the right direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is pressed, the protruding portion that exists immediately below the right direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 among the protruding portions 813a enters the inside of the fourth press detector 81d. Based on this, it is detected that the right direction portion has been pressed. Further, when the forward direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is pressed, the protruding portion existing immediately below the forward direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 among the protruding portions 813a enters the inside of the first press detector 81a. Based on the above, it is detected that the front portion has been pressed. Further, when the rear portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is pressed, the protruding portion that exists immediately below the rear portion of the pressing operation portion 811 among the protruding portions 813a enters the inside of the third press detector 81c. Based on this, it is detected that the backward portion has been pressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17C, when the central portion of the pressing operation unit 811 is normally pressed, the first pressing detector 81a, the second pressing detector 81b, and the third pressing detection are usually performed. A protrusion 813a is inserted into at least two of the device 81c and the fourth press detector 81d. Accordingly, the pressing portion 813a is inserted into at least two of the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d. It is detected that the central portion of the operation unit 811 has been pressed.

  The first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f are detectors provided for detecting a left rotation operation and a right rotation operation by the rotation operation unit 812. As shown in FIG. 16A, each rotation detector includes a photosensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and when the dial base 816 is rotated, the rotation detecting wall portion 816a is a light emitting portion. It is provided at a position where it can pass between the light receiving parts. The positional relationship between the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f is such that, for example, when the first rotation detector 81e detects a rotation detection wall portion 816a, the second rotation detector 81f The rotation detection wall portion 816a is not separated from the rotation detection wall portion 816a and is spaced apart by a predetermined distance.

  In each rotation detector, when the rotation detection wall portion 816a of the dial base 816 enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, light from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion is blocked. Since the rotation detection wall portions 816a are arranged at a predetermined interval as described above, the detection signals output from the respective rotation detectors are detected when the dial base 816 is rotating. Is a pulse signal that repeats an on state in which no rotation is detected and an off state in which the rotation detection wall portion 816a is detected. In the effect control microcomputer 100, as will be described later, based on the relationship between the state of the detection signal of the first rotation detector 81e and the state of the detection signal of the second rotation detector 81f, the rotation operation by the rotation operation unit 812 is performed. Is detected.

  An operation unit center lamp 82A, which is a multi-color LED, is provided at the center of the operation unit substrate 818. The operation unit center lamp 82A is an LED for causing the character string printed on the display member 811A to emit light when the determination operation by the pressing operation unit 811 is performed or when the rotation operation by the rotation operation unit 812 is performed. . The light from the operation unit central lamp 82A passes through the internal space of the button base 817 and the internal space of the button housing 813 and reaches the central part of the operation unit substrate 818 (see FIG. 16C). The printed character string emits light, and the character string in the light emitting state can be visually recognized by the pressing operation unit 811.

  In this embodiment, in the state where the operation unit center lamp 82A is not emitting light, as shown in FIG. 14A, the character string cannot be visually recognized on the pressing operation unit 811. For example, when the operation unit center lamp 82A emits red light, a character string (for example, a character string such as “Press!”) Printed on the display member 811A with red paint 811B by the red light from the operation unit center lamp 82A. Is in a blinking state (it may be lit), and as shown in FIG. 15A, a red character string (for example, a character string such as “Press!”) Is visible in the pressing operation unit 811. Further, by displaying a character string such as “Press!”, The player recognizes that the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 811 is instructed by confirming the display on the pressing operation unit 811. be able to. In addition, for example, when the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light, a character string (for example, “Turn !!” or the like) printed on the display member 811A with the blue paint 811C by the blue light from the operation unit center lamp 82A. Column) is lit (may be blinking), and as shown in FIG. 15B, a blue character string (for example, a character string such as “Press!”) Can be visually recognized in the pressing operation unit 811. Become. Further, by displaying a character string such as “Turn !!”, the player recognizes that the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is instructed by confirming the display on the pressing operation unit 811. be able to.

  In this embodiment, a case where one multi-color LED is arranged as the operation unit center lamp 82A is shown. However, a red single color LED and a blue single color LED are provided at the center of the operation unit 81. Each may be arranged. When prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit 811, a character string such as “Press!” Is displayed on the pressing operation unit 811 by blinking the red single-color LED (may be turned on). When prompting the operation of the rotation operation unit 812, a character string such as “Turn it!” May be displayed on the pressing operation unit 811 by lighting a blue single-color LED (may be blinking). .

  The first press operation unit lamp 82a to the eighth press operation unit lamp 82h are positions on the operation unit substrate 818 where the first press detector 81a to the fourth press detector 81d are arranged from the center of the operation unit substrate 818. Further, they are arranged at predetermined intervals on concentric circles centered on the central portion of the operation unit substrate 818 at positions outside the center. The first pressing operation unit lamp 82a is provided in the vicinity of the first pressing detector 81a. The second pressing operation unit lamp 82b is provided in the vicinity of the second pressing detector 81b. The third pressing operation unit lamp 82c is provided in the vicinity of the third pressing detector 81c. The fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d is provided in the vicinity of the fourth pressing detector 81d. The fifth pressing operation unit lamp 82e is provided between the first operation unit lamp 82a and the second operation unit lamp 82b. The sixth pressing operation unit lamp 82f is provided between the second operation unit lamp 82b and the third operation unit lamp 82c. The seventh pressing operation unit lamp 82g is provided between the third operation unit lamp 82c and the fourth operation unit lamp 82d. The eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h is provided between the fourth operation unit lamp 82d and the first operation unit lamp 82a.

  The first pressing operation unit lamp 82a is an LED for causing the front direction part of the pressing operation unit 811 that is a position to be operated when performing the forward direction selection operation in the pressing operation unit 811 to emit light. The light from the first pressing operation portion lamp 82a passes through the inner space of the button base 817 and the light guide portion 813b for guiding the light for light emission in the front direction in the button housing 813, and reaches the front direction portion of the operation portion substrate 818. As a result, the forward direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 emits light.

  The second pressing operation unit lamp 82b is composed of an LED for causing the left direction part of the pressing operation unit 811, which is a position to be operated when performing the left direction selection operation, of the pressing operation unit 811 to emit light. Light emitted from the second pressing operation portion lamp 82b passes through the inner space of the button base 817 and the light guide portion 813b that guides light for light emission in the left direction in the button housing 813, and reaches the left direction portion of the operation portion substrate 818. As a result, the left direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 emits light.

  The third pressing operation portion lamp 82c is an LED for causing the rear portion of the pressing operation portion 811 that is a position to be operated when performing the backward direction selection operation of the pressing operation portion 811 to emit light. The light from the third pressing operation portion lamp 82c passes through the inner space of the button base 817 and the light guide portion 813b for guiding the light for the rear portion light emission in the button housing 813, and reaches the rear portion of the operation portion substrate 818. As a result, the backward portion of the pressing operation portion 811 emits light.

  The fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d is an LED for causing the right direction part of the pressing operation unit 811, which is a position to be operated when performing the right direction selection operation, of the pressing operation unit 811 to emit light. The light from the fourth pressing operation portion lamp 82d passes through the inner space of the button base 817 and the light guide portion 813b for guiding the light for light emission in the right direction portion of the button housing 813, and reaches the right direction portion of the operation portion substrate 818. Thus, the right direction part of the pressing operation part 811 emits light.

  Next, the inside of the game frame 11 and the back surface of the game board 6 will be described.

  FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the game frame 11 is opened. As shown in FIG. 18, five substrates (frame side IC substrates) 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B for mounting ICs and the like are attached to the back surface on the game frame 11 side. The frame-side IC board 602 attached to the upper part of the game frame 11 is mounted with serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 and 611 for converting serial data into parallel data. From the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 and 611, the top frame lamp A control signal is supplied to each of the LEDs 281a to 281l. Further, the frame side IC substrate 603 attached to the right side (left side when viewed from the back side) of the game frame 11 is mounted with a serial-parallel conversion IC 612, and each LED 283 a to the right frame lamp from the serial-parallel conversion IC 612. A control signal is supplied to 283f. Further, the frame side IC substrate 604 attached to the left side (right side as viewed from the back side) of the game frame 11 is mounted with a serial-parallel conversion IC 613, and each LED 282 a-of the left frame lamp from the serial-parallel conversion IC 613. A control signal is supplied to 282f.

  Further, the frame side IC substrate 605A attached to the lower side of the game frame 11 and on the back side of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 has serial-parallel conversion ICs 614, 622, 623 and parallel data as serial data. An input IC 620 for converting the signal to the ball is mounted, and a control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 to each of the LEDs 882a to 882f of the upper plate lamp provided on the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, and the serial-parallel conversion IC 622 is supplied. Control signals are supplied from the LEDs (eight first pressing operation unit lamps 82a to 82h shown in FIG. 16) provided in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 to perform serial-parallel conversion. From the IC 623, LEDs (operation unit center lamp 82A shown in FIG. Control signal is supplied to the number of first rotational operating portion lamp 82i~ fourth rotational operating portion lamp 82l). In addition, detection signals from the detectors 81 a to 81 f of the operation unit 81 are input in parallel to the input IC 620.

  Further, a frame-side IC board 605B attached to the lower side of the game frame 11 and on the back side of the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is mounted with a serial-parallel conversion IC 615, and the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 is mounted. Then, control signals are supplied to the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower pan lamps provided in the surplus ball tray (lower pan) 4.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in this embodiment, the frame side IC board 602 attached to the upper part of the game frame 11 among the frame side IC boards 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B has two serial- It is configured as a collective board on which a parallel conversion IC is mounted. With such a configuration, it is possible to consolidate boards on which serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted, and it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the gaming machine.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 18, a relay board 607 is attached to the game frame 11 side, and wiring from the relay board 607 is connected to the frame side IC board 604, and the frame side IC board 604 is connected to the frame side IC. The frame side IC substrate 602 is connected to the frame side IC substrate 603. Further, the wiring from the relay board 607 is connected to the frame side board 605A. Further, the wiring from the relay board 607 is connected to the frame side board 605B. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the wiring between the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604 and the wiring between the frame side IC substrates 604, 605A, 605B and the relay substrate 607 are provided with connectors 156a to 156j on each substrate. Connected. FIG. 18 shows a case where wiring connection is performed using a connector of a type that is connected to the substrate in the vertical direction. For example, wiring connection is performed using a connector that is connected to the substrate in the horizontal direction. You may make it perform.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the wiring from the connector 156a of the relay board 607 is connected to the connector 156b of the frame side IC board 604. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 604 is further branched from the connector 156b, one is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613, and the other is connected to the connector 156c. Further, in the frame side IC substrate 604, the connector 156c is arranged at an end portion on the frame side IC substrate 602 side. The wiring from the connector 156c of the frame side IC substrate 604 is connected to the connector 156d of the frame side IC substrate 602. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 602 is further branched into three from the connector 156d and connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 610, the serial-parallel conversion IC 611, and the connector 156e. Further, in the frame side IC substrate 602, the connector 156e is disposed at an end portion on the frame side IC substrate 603 side. The wiring from the connector 156e of the frame side IC substrate 602 is connected to the connector 156f of the frame side IC substrate 603. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 603 is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612.

  Further, the wiring from the connector 156g of the relay board 607 is connected to the connector 156h of the frame side IC board 605A. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 605A is further branched from the connector 156h, and one is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 and the other is connected to the input IC 620.

  Further, the wiring from the connector 156i of the relay board 607 is connected to the connector 156j of the frame side IC board 605B. The wiring pattern of the frame side IC substrate 605B is connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615.

  Although not shown in FIG. 18, a door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game frame 11 is also attached.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory view showing the back surface of the game board 6. As shown in FIG. 19, a base (board side IC substrate) 601 for mounting an IC or the like is attached to the back surface of the game board 6. The board side IC substrate 601 is equipped with four serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 for converting serial data into parallel data, and a motor for driving the movable members 151 and 152 from the serial-parallel conversion IC 616. A control signal is supplied to 151a and 152a. Further, a control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 617 to the LEDs 125a to 125f of the center decoration lamp. Further, a control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 618 to each LED 126a to 126f of the stage lamp. Further, a control signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 619 to the peripheral LEDs 127a to 127c (not shown in FIG. 19) such as an attacker.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in this embodiment, the board side IC substrate 601 is configured as a collective substrate on which three serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted. With such a configuration, it is possible to consolidate boards on which serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted, and it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the gaming machine.

  The board side IC board 601 is equipped with an input IC 621 for converting parallel data into serial data, and detection signals from the position sensors 151b and 152b for detecting the positions of the movable members 151 and 152 are input ICs 621. Are input in parallel.

  As shown in FIG. 19, a relay board 606 is attached to the game board 6 side, and a relay board 607 is provided on the game frame 11 side. The wiring from the effect control means is first connected to the relay board 606 and further connected to the relay board 607. The wiring from the relay board 606 is connected to the board side IC board 601. Further, as shown in FIG. 19, the wiring between the board side IC substrate 601 and the relay substrate 606, the wiring between the relay substrates 606 and 607, and the wiring between the relay substrate 606 and the effect control means are as shown in FIG. Are connected using connectors 157a to 157e. The connection method of the connectors 157a to 157e is the same as the connection method of the connectors 156a to 156h shown in FIG.

  Further, the relay relays the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the panel side IC substrate 601. A substrate may be provided. In this case, the relay board may be arranged on either the game frame 11 side or the game board 6 side.

  Further, a relay board may be provided to relay the effect control board 80 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC boards 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B. In this case, the relay board may be arranged on either the game frame 11 side or the game board 6 side.

  An opening is formed in the upper plate of the plastic frame above the hole for paying out the game ball, and a relay board 607 is provided in the opening. The relay board 607 is a board that relays through the front and back connectors. The connector 157a is disposed on the front side of the plastic frame, and the connectors 156a, 156g, and 156i are disposed on the back side. Further, the relay board 607 is disposed at the end of the opening to which the game board 6 is attached. As shown in FIG. 18, the relay board 607 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the end of the opening to which the game board 6 is attached. The relay board 607 is in a state of being shifted so that the positions of the connector 157a arranged on the front side and the connectors 156a, 156g, 156i arranged on the back side do not overlap.

  A relay board 606 is provided on the back side of the game board 6. As shown in FIG. 19, the relay board 606 is provided at the end of the game board 6 so as to be positioned in the vicinity of the relay board 607 of the plastic frame. The relay board 606 is a board that relays via a connector, and connectors 157b to 157d are arranged. The connector 157b is connected to the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the game board 6.

  Next, circuit configurations of the main board (game control board) 31 and the effect control board 80 will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 20 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. And a serial output circuit for converting parallel data into serial data and outputting the serial data. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  A random number circuit 503 for generating hardware random numbers is connected to the game control microcomputer 560. The game control microcomputer 560 reads the random number value from the random number circuit 503 when the condition for extracting the random number value is satisfied. The random number circuit 503 is a counter that counts clock signals having a predetermined frequency, and the count value of the counter becomes a random value. A clock signal having a predetermined frequency supplied to the random number circuit 503 is input to a clear terminal of a monitoring circuit (watchdog timer (WDT)) 504. The monitoring circuit is a counter that counts a clock signal having a frequency higher than the frequency of the clock signal input to the clear terminal, but the count value is reset when the clock signal input to the clear terminal becomes high level, for example. Therefore, when the clock signal input to the clear terminal stops for some reason, the monitoring circuit 504 counts up. The fact that the monitoring circuit 504 has counted up indicates that no clock signal is supplied to the random number circuit 503. When counting up, the monitoring circuit 504 outputs a random number error signal indicating that the random number circuit 503 is not operating normally to the gaming control microcomputer 560.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special symbol display 8 that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, a special symbol hold memory display 18, and a normal symbol hold memory display 41. Perform display control.

  The serial output circuit 78 mounted on the game control microcomputer 560 is constituted by a shift register or the like. The serial control circuit 78 converts the presentation control command output from the CPU 56 into serial data, and sends it to the presentation control board 80 via the relay board 77. Send. The serial output circuit 78 converts the control signal output from the CPU 56 into serial data, and via the relay board 77, the special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol. Output to the on-hold storage display 41. The special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10 and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 are provided with serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting serial data into parallel data, respectively. The control signal from the relay board 77 is converted into parallel data and supplied to the special symbol display 8, the special symbol hold storage display 18, the normal symbol display 10, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41.

  The game control microcomputer 560 may include an output circuit that transmits the effect control command in the parallel signal format, and the effect control command output from the CPU 56 may be transmitted to the effect control board 80 in the parallel signal format.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via an information terminal board (frame board / external terminal board) 36 is also mainly used. It is mounted on the substrate 31. The information terminal board 36 is installed on the back surface of the gaming machine. An information output signal from the payout control board 37 is also input to the information terminal board 36.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 is used to provide effect control from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The command is received by a serial signal system (serial communication system: a system in which data is transmitted by one signal line), and display control of the variable display device 9 for variably displaying decorative symbols is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 includes center decoration lamps 125a to 125f provided on the game board 6, stage lamps 126a to 126f, and lamps 127a to 127a provided around the attacker. In addition to performing display control of 127c, the top frame lamps 281a to 281l, the left frame lamps 282a to 282f, the right frame lamps 283a to 283f, the upper pan lamps 882a to 882f, and the pressing operation unit in the operation unit 81 are provided on the frame side. Display control of the lamps 82a to 82h, the operation unit center lamp 82A, the rotation operation unit lamps 82i to 82l, and the lower pan lamps 884a to 884f is performed. Further, the production control means controls the sound output from the speaker 27.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 includes lamps 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 127a to 127c, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 882a to 882a to output from the effect control means. A serial output circuit 353 for converting a control signal for display control of 882f, 82a to 82l, 82A, 884a to 884f from parallel data to serial data is mounted. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 is equipped with a serial input circuit 354 that converts the input serial data into parallel data and outputs the parallel data to the effect control means. Accordingly, the effect control means outputs the control signal as a serial data system via the serial output circuit 353, whereby the lamps 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 127a to 127c, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283a. Display control of 283f, 82a to 82f, 83, 84a to 84f (specifically, light emission control, that is, lighting control (flashing control)) is performed.

  On the game board side, a board-side IC board 601 on which a serial-parallel conversion IC for converting serial data into parallel data is mounted. The board side IC substrate 601 is connected to the effect control substrate 80 via the relay substrate 606. On the game frame 11 side, frame-side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B on which serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting serial data into parallel data are mounted. Each frame side IC substrate 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B is connected to the effect control substrate 80 via the relay substrate 606, 607.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 20, the effect control board 80, the relay board 606, and the relay board 607 are connected to the bus type by one system wiring route.

  FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 21, a case where an effect control board 80 and an audio output board 70 are provided for the effect control is shown. The audio output board 70 is not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. In addition to the effect control board 80 and the audio output board 70, a lamp driver board may be provided. In this case as well, a microcomputer may or may not be mounted on the lamp driver board. Further, only the effect control board 80 may be provided.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101, a RAM (not shown), a serial output circuit 353, a serial input circuit 354, a clock signal output unit 356 and an input capture signal output unit 357. It is installed. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives an effect control command via the serial input circuit 102 and the input port 103. In this case, the serial input circuit 102 converts the effect control command received as the serial data method into parallel data and outputs the parallel data. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the variable display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the variable display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. The VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the variable display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the variable display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 21 illustrates a diode.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp via the serial output circuit 353. The serial output circuit converts the input signal (parallel data) for driving the LED of the lamp into serial data and outputs the serial data to the relay board 606. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs the sound number data to the voice synthesis IC 173 mounted on the voice output board 70 via the output port 108.

  Further, the clock signal output unit 356 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 606. The clock signal from the clock signal output unit 356 is supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 and the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC boards 602, 603, 604, 604A, and 605B via the relay boards 606 and 607. The The clock signal from the clock signal output unit 356 is supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 and the input IC 621 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 via the relay substrate 606. Therefore, in this embodiment, a common clock signal is supplied to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619 and the input ICs 620 and 621.

  In addition, the input capture signal output unit 357 receives input to the board side IC board 601 or the frame side IC boards 602, 603, 604, 604A, and 605B via the relay boards 606 and 607 in accordance with the instruction of the effect control CPU 101. Output a latch signal. When the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC substrate 605A receives an input capture signal from the production control microcomputer 100, the first press detector 81a to the fourth press detector 81d, the first rotation detector 81e, and The detection signal of the second rotation detector 81f is latched and output to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607 as a serial data system. The input IC 621 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 latches the detection signals of the position sensors 151b and 152b when an input input signal from the production control microcomputer 100 is input, and relays the serial board as a serial data system. It outputs to the production control microcomputer 100 via 606.

  In the voice output board 70, when the voice synthesis IC 173 inputs the sound number data via the input driver 172, the voice synthesis ROM 174 refers to the voice data ROM 174, generates a voice or sound effect corresponding to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplification circuit 175. To do. The amplifier circuit 175 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 173 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 176 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 174 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect control board 80, the relay boards 606 and 607, the board side IC board 601, and the frame side IC boards 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B. The effect control microcomputer 100 of the effect control board 80 outputs a clock signal to the relay board 606 together with serial data as a control signal. In addition, an input capture signal for causing the input ICs 620 and 621 to latch the input signal is output to the relay board 606.

  The relay board 606 supplies the serial data and the clock signal input from the effect control microcomputer 100 to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC board 601. And each serial-parallel conversion IC616-619 converts the input serial data into parallel data, LED125a-125f of each lamp provided in the game board 6, 126a-126f, 127a-127c, and each movable member To the motors 151a and 152a.

  Further, the relay board 607 is connected to the relay board 606 through a single wiring route in a bus type, and the serial data line 300 and the clock signal line 301 connected to each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 are connected to the board side. It is connected to the bus form on the IC substrate 601. The connection to the bus type means that a plurality of serial-parallel conversion ICs or relay boards are connected to one wiring route.

  Each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 has a unique ID. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, the ID of IC 616 is 06, the ID of IC 617 is 07, the ID of IC 618 is 08, and the ID of IC 619 is 09.

  In addition, an input IC 621 for inputting a detection signal of a position sensor of each movable member provided on the game board 6 is mounted on the board side IC board 601. In this embodiment, the input IC 621 and the production control microcomputer 100 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 include an input signal line 302, a clock signal line 301, and an input capture signal line 303 via a relay board 606. The presentation control microcomputer 100 is connected and outputs an input capture signal to the input IC 621 via the relay board 606 at a predetermined timing. Then, the input IC 621 latches the detection signal of each position sensor based on the input fetch signal (latch signal) and outputs it to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 606. In this case, the input IC 621 converts the detection signal input in parallel from each position sensor into serial data and outputs it. In this embodiment, the unique ID of the input IC 621 is 11, as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the serial data and the clock signal input to the relay board 607 are supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC boards 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B. The And each serial-parallel conversion IC610-615 converts the input serial data into parallel data, LED281a-281l of each lamp provided in the game frame 11, 282a-282f, 283a-283f, 882a-882f, 884a to 884f, 82a to 82h, 82A, 82i to 82l.

  The serial data lines and clock signal lines connected to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 613 are connected in a bus format on the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 of the frame-side IC board 604 is input, and the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 and the serial-parallel conversion IC 610 and the serial-parallel of the frame-side IC board 602 are input. The signals are input in the order of the parallel conversion IC 611, and further input from the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 of the frame side IC substrate 603. The serial data lines and clock signal lines connected to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 614, 620, 622, and 623 are connected in a bus format on the frame side IC substrate 605A. The serial data line and the clock signal line connected to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 are directly connected from the relay substrate 607.

  Each serial-parallel conversion IC 610-615, 622, 623 mounted on each frame side IC substrate 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B has a unique ID. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, the ID of IC 610 is 00, the ID of IC 611 is 01, the ID of IC 612 is 02, the ID of IC 613 is 03, and the ID of IC 614 is 04. The ID of IC 615 is 05, IC 622 is 12, and IC 623 is 13.

  Further, an input IC 620 for inputting detection signals from the detectors 81 a to 81 f of the operation unit 81 provided in the game frame 11 is mounted on the frame side IC substrate 605A. In this embodiment, an input signal line, a clock signal line, and an input take-in signal line are connected to the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC board 605A and the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607. Thus, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs an input capture signal to the input IC 620 via the relay boards 606 and 607 at a predetermined timing. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 outputs the input capture signal to the input IC 620 at a timing different from the timing of outputting the input capture signal to the input IC 621. Then, the input IC 620 latches the detection signals from the detectors 81a to 81f of the operation unit 81 based on the input capture signal (latch signal), and outputs it to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the relay boards 606 and 607. To do. In this case, the input IC 620 converts the detection signals input in parallel from the detectors 81a to 81f of the operation unit 81 into serial data and outputs the serial data. In this embodiment, the unique ID of the input IC 620 is 10 as shown in FIG.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615, 622, and 623 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B are 1 They are connected via system wiring. Specifically, the connection via one line of wiring means that the relay boards 606 and 607 are connected in a bus type, and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 618 are connected in a bus type or a daisy chain type. It is that. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 618 are connected in a bus type. As described above, in this embodiment, each serial-parallel conversion IC 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and each serial-mount mounted on each frame side IC substrate 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B. Parallel ICs 610 to 615, 622, and 623 are connected to each other via a single line of wiring using connectors 156a to 156j and 157a to 157e via relay boards 606 and 607. Therefore, the wiring work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be performed simply by attaching and detaching the connector, and the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be attached and detached more easily.

  Further, according to this embodiment, serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 610 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B. A common clock signal is input from the production control microcomputer 100 to 615, 622, 623 and the input ICs 620, 621. Therefore, the wiring of the clock signal to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619, 622, and 623 and the wiring of the clock signal to the input ICs 620 and 621 can be shared, and between the effect control means and the board-side IC 601 board. Communication and communication between the effect control means and the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B can be realized using one channel, respectively, and the number of wirings can be reduced. Also, serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615, 622 623 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605 A, and 605 B, and input The ICs 620 and 621 can be easily synchronized, and the number of clock signal wirings can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619, 622, and 623 is assigned an address in advance, and the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a control signal converted into serial data. Outputs serial data with an address added. When each serial-parallel conversion IC 610-619, 622, 623 inputs serial data, it checks whether the address added to the input serial data matches its own address. The data is converted and supplied to the LED of each lamp (ie, output). If the addresses do not match, the LED of each lamp is not supplied.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the production control microcomputer 100 performs bidirectional communication with the board-side IC board 601 and the frame-side IC boards 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B (specifically, serial data). Are transmitted to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619, 622, and 623, and input signals are input from the input ICs 620 and 621). Input and data output can be performed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, the data input terminal and the data output terminal of one channel are respectively connected to different output target devices (in this example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619, 622, and 623). It is connected to an input target device (in this example, input ICs 620 and 621). With such a configuration, when the output target device and the input target device are originally different devices, the communication should be performed using different channels in both directions. Communication is possible, and the number of channels between the production control microcomputer 100 and the board-side IC board 601 and the frame-side IC boards 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B is reduced.

  In this embodiment, the channel is a terminal for a data line (output data line), a clock signal line, an input signal line (input data line), and an input take-in signal line (signal line for input data read request). Is a set. One channel may include a ground wire or a terminal dedicated to the power source. Further, in this embodiment, a case where both data input and data output are performed using one channel is shown, but an output-dedicated channel in which only a terminal for a data line (output data line) and a clock signal line is set. May be used. Alternatively, an input-only channel in which only terminals for input signal lines (input data lines) and input take-in signal lines (input data read request signal lines) are set may be used.

  23 to 25 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of addresses given to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619, 622, and 623. FIG. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the addresses of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619, 622, and 623 shown in FIGS. 23 to 25 in a predetermined address storage area previously provided in the ROM. is doing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615, 622, and 623 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B, Address 00 is assigned, IC 611 is assigned address 01, IC 612 is given address 02, IC 613 is given address 03, IC 614 is given address 04, and IC 615 is given address 05. , The address 12 is assigned to the IC 622 and the address 13 is assigned to the IC 623. Further, in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, the address 006 is assigned to the IC 616, the address 07 is given to the IC 617, the address 08 is given to the IC 618, and the IC 619 is given to the IC 619. Address 09 is given.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619, 622, and 623 may be assigned the same ID as the unique ID of the IC, and an address including numbers, characters, and symbols different from the unique ID of the IC. It may be given.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, the serial-parallel conversion IC 610 whose address is 00 converts serial data into parallel data, and the LED of the top frame lamp of the game frame 11 (the top frame lamp 281a in this example). To 6 LEDs (281a to 281f) of .about.281l. The serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is 01 converts serial data into parallel data, and the LED of the ceiling lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, the other six LEDs (281g to 281g to 280g). 281 l)). The serial-parallel conversion IC 612 whose address is 02 converts the serial data into parallel data and supplies the parallel data to the LEDs of the right frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, 6 LEDs (283a to 283f)). The serial-parallel conversion IC 613 whose address is 03 converts the serial data into parallel data and supplies it to the LEDs of the left frame lamp of the game frame 11 (in this example, 6 LEDs (282a to 282f)).

  The serial-parallel conversion IC 614 whose address is 04 converts the serial data into parallel data, and an upper pan lamp (six LEDs (882a to 882f in this example)) provided on the hitting ball supply tray 3 of the game frame 11 To supply. As shown in FIG. 23, the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided with two LEDs each as an upper plate lamp on the front, left side, and right side. The serial-parallel conversion IC 622 whose address is 12 converts the serial data into parallel data, and the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h provided in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81. (In this example, 8 LEDs). The serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is 13 converts the serial data into parallel data, and inputs the red light emission input terminal and the blue light emission of the operation unit center lamp 82A provided in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81. And the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l (four LEDs in this example) provided in the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81.

  Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is 05 converts the serial data into parallel data, and lower tray lamps provided in the surplus ball receiving tray 4 of the game frame 11 (in this example, 6 LEDs (884a to 884f)) To supply.

  The serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is 06 converts serial data into parallel data, and each movable member provided in the game board 6 (in this example, a role imitating the shape of a beam and a truck). It is supplied to a motor for driving (in this example, three motors (151a, 152a) are each in the direction opposite to the forward direction). The serial-parallel conversion IC 617 whose address is 07 converts serial data into parallel data, and each lamp of the decorative structure (center decoration) provided in the center of the game board 6 (in this example, six LEDs (125a To 125 f)). Further, the serial-parallel conversion IC 618 whose address is 08 converts serial data into parallel data, and supplies it to each stage lamp (in this example, six LEDs (126a to 126f)) provided around the variable display device 9. To do. A serial-parallel conversion IC 619 whose address is 09 converts serial data into parallel data, and lamp LEDs (LED3 in this example) provided around the movable member (in this example, variable winning ball device 15, attacker). (127a-127c)).

  In this embodiment, each input IC 620, 621 is also given an address in advance. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of addresses given to the input ICs 620 and 621. In FIG. The production control microcomputer 100 stores the addresses of the input ICs 620 and 621 in a predetermined address storage area provided in advance in the ROM. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26, the address 10 is given to the input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC substrate 605, and the address 11 is given to the input IC 621 mounted on the panel side IC substrate 601. ing.

  Each input IC 620, 621 may be given the same ID as the unique ID of the IC as an address, or may be given an address including numbers, characters, and symbols different from the unique ID of the IC.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 26, the input IC 620 whose address is 10 is the detection signal of the detection signal of the first press detector 81 a to the fourth press detector 81 d provided in the game frame 11, or the game frame 11. The detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f provided are input in parallel, converted into serial data, and output. Further, the input IC 621 whose address is 11 inputs the detection signals of the position sensors 151b and 152b (2 in this example) provided on each movable member of the game board 6 in parallel, converts them into serial data, and outputs them. .

  FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing the configuration of each serial-parallel conversion IC 610-619, 622, 623. As illustrated in FIG. 27, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619, 622, and 623 include a data latch unit 651, a shift register 652, a header / address detection unit 653, a data buffer 655, and a sync driver 656.

  The data latch unit 651 includes, for example, a latch circuit. When serial data is input, the data latch unit 651 latches the input data bit by bit at the rising timing of the clock signal pulse and outputs the latched data to the shift register 652. The shift register 652 sequentially stores data input bit by bit from the data latch unit 651. The shift register 652 shifts stored data bit by bit at the rising timing of the pulse of the clock signal. By repeatedly shifting the stored data bit by bit as described above, the data finally input as serial data (that is, in a serial manner) is stored in the shift register 652.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the format of serial data output from the production control microcomputer 100. FIG. FIG. 28A shows a data format of serial data output as lamp lighting data for individually lighting or extinguishing the LEDs of each lamp provided on the game board 6 or the game frame 11. FIG. 28B shows the format of serial data output as a reset command for resetting the LEDs of the respective lamps provided on the game board 6 and the game frame 11 to turn off all the lights.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the lamp lighting data is composed of 28 bits, and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit addresses, 8-bit data, and end bits (E). .

  The header data represents the head of the data, and is 1FF (h) in this example. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0 in this example) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the address and between the address and the data. The address is the address of the data-output destination serial-parallel conversion IC. An ID that is a unique serial number of each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619, 622, and 623 may be used as the address.

  The data (8 bits) is for controlling the lighting state of the LED of each lamp, and includes, for example, a logical value 1 as a bit corresponding to the LED of the lamp to be lit, Corresponding bits contain the logical value 0. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data, and has a logical value of 0 in this example.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (B), the reset command is composed of 19 bits and includes 9-bit header data, mark bits (M), 8-bit reset data, and end bits (E).

  The header data represents the head of the data, and is 1FF (h) in this example. The mark bit (M) is a bit (logical value 0 in this example) representing a data delimiter, and is inserted between the header data and the reset data. The reset data is for resetting the lighting states of the LEDs of the respective lamps so that all the lamps are extinguished. The end bit (E) indicates the end of data, and has a logical value of 0 in this example.

  In this embodiment, the lamp lighting data shown in FIG. 28A or the reset command shown in FIG. 28B is input, and the shift register 652 is repeatedly shifted bit by bit at the rising timing of the pulse of the clock signal. Will be stored.

  The header / address detector 653 detects the header and address from the data stored in the shift register 652. First, the header / address detection unit 653 constantly detects data from the shift register 652, and confirms whether or not the content of the detected data matches 1FF (h) corresponding to the header data. If it matches the header data (1FF (h)), it is determined that the position that matches the header data is the head of the data, and it is determined that one set of lamp lighting data or reset command is stored in the shift register 652. Next, the header / address detection unit 653 detects the 11th to 18th bits of data from the head corresponding to the address from the shift register 652, and whether or not it matches the address previously given to the serial-parallel conversion IC. To check. The board side IC substrate 601 and each frame side IC substrate 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B are provided with an address storage register 654 for storing the address of each serial-parallel conversion IC to be mounted, for example. The address detection unit 653 may confirm whether or not the address detected from the shift register 652 matches the address stored in the address storage register 654 in advance. If the addresses match, the header / address detection 653 determines that data destined for the serial-parallel conversion IC has been input, and outputs an input capture signal (latch signal) to the data buffer 655. If the addresses do not match, the header / address detection 653 does not output the input capture signal to the data buffer 655. That is, in this case, since the data is not destined for the serial-parallel conversion IC, the data stored in the shift register 652 is discarded without being output to the data buffer 655.

  27 shows a case where the address storage register 654 is provided in advance on the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B. Thus, an external hardware circuit (for example, the effect control board 80 is mounted) via an address terminal (8 terminals (corresponding to each bit of the 8-bit address)) provided in the serial-parallel conversion IC. An address may be input from the circuit). Then, an address may be input to the serial-parallel conversion IC by controlling the input of each address terminal to high or low from the external hardware circuit side. In this case, for example, the external hardware circuit sets the input to the terminal to high by applying a voltage to the terminal corresponding to any bit of the address, or sets the input to the terminal to low by switching to the ground. Control to do.

  The data buffer 655 is constituted by, for example, a latch register. When an input capture signal is input from the header / address detector 653, the data of the 20th to 27th bits from the head corresponding to the data portion is captured from the shift register 652. Latch with. The data buffer 655 supplies (that is, outputs) the fetched data to the LEDs of each lamp as parallel data (Q0 to Q7).

  If the data stored in the shift register 652 is a reset command, the 11th to 18th bits from the beginning all store data having a logical value of 1. In this case, the data buffer 655 determines that a reset command has been input when all data having a logical value of 1 is fetched, and the LEDs of all the lamps are reset and turned off.

  The sync driver 656 inverts and outputs the logical value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 based on a predetermined logic inversion setting signal, or outputs it as it is. For example, when the predetermined logic inversion setting signal is High, the signal is turned on when the bit value of the parallel data output from the data buffer 655 is 1 (that is, the corresponding bit value of the lamp lighting data is 1), An ON signal is output to the LED of each lamp. In this embodiment, the set value of the logic inversion setting signal is set in advance in the registers provided on the panel side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B. According to the set value, an ON signal is output to the LED of each lamp, and the LED of each lamp is turned on.

  FIG. 29 is a timing chart showing an example of input timing of serial data and clock signals to the serial-parallel conversion IC and output timing of parallel data. In FIG. 29, a case where lamp lighting data is input as a serial data method will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, the serial data is input to the shift register 652 of the serial-parallel conversion IC in units of 1 bit in the order of header data, mark bits, addresses, mark bits, data, and end bits. The series of data is set as one set. The header / address detection unit 653 does not detect header data until one set of serial data (in this example, lamp lighting data) is completely input, so the output of the data buffer 655 does not change. Therefore, the lighting pattern based on the previously received serial data is output as it is as a parallel data system from the serial-parallel conversion IC.

  When all sets of serial data have been input, the data portion from the data stored in the shift register 652 is latched in the data buffer 655, and a lighting pattern based on the newly received serial data is output as a parallel data system. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, among the parallel data output from the serial-parallel conversion IC, Q0 and Q4 are the rising timing of the pulse of the next clock signal after the completion of the serial data input. Immediately, the data is switched to new lighting pattern data. Q1 and Q5 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of one clock from Q0 and Q4. Q2 and Q6 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of two clocks from Q0 and Q4. Further, Q3 and Q7 are switched to new lighting pattern data with a delay of three clocks from Q0 and Q4.

  FIG. 30 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of each of the input ICs 620 and 621. As shown in FIG. 30, in this embodiment, each of the input ICs 620 and 621 is composed of a plurality (eight in this example) of D flip-flops 661 to 668. In this embodiment, detection signals from the operation buttons 81a to 81e or the position sensors 151b and 152b are input in parallel to the input ICs 620 and 621, and input to one of the D flip-flops 661 to 668 for each detection signal. The A clock signal is input to each of the D flip-flops 661 to 668, and each D flip-flop 661 to 668 sequentially performs a shift operation at the rising edge of the clock. The detection signals input in parallel are converted into serial data and output.

  Each D flip-flop 661 to 668 receives an input capture signal (latch signal) from the effect control microcomputer 100 at a predetermined timing. When an input capture signal is input, detection signals from the operation buttons 81a to 81e or the position sensors 151b and 152b are latched by the D flip-flops 661 to 668, respectively. The latched detection signal is sequentially shifted at the rising edge of the clock and output as a serial data system.

  Next, in the production control microcomputer 100, processing for detecting the rotation direction and the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation operation unit 812 based on detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f will be described. To do.

  FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f when the rotation operation unit 812 is rotated. In FIG. 31, (a) shows a timing chart when the rotation operation unit 812 rotates to the right, and (b) shows a timing chart when the rotation operation unit 812 rotates left. In the figure, “L” indicates the L level, and “H” indicates the H level. In addition, the timing indicated by the dotted line in the figure indicates the timing at which the click position is reached in the detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f.

  As shown to (a), at the time of right rotation, the signal level of the 1st rotation detector 81e and the signal level of the 2nd rotation detector 81f are "L, L"-> "H, L"-> "H, H" → “L, H” → “L, L” (“the signal level of the first rotation detector 81e, the signal level of the second rotation detector 81f”) changes the signal pattern four times. Also, as shown in (b), during left rotation, the signal level of the first rotation detector 81e and the signal level of the second rotation detector 81f are changed from “L, H” → “H, H” → “H, The signal pattern changes four times such as “L” → “L, L” → “L, H” (“the signal level of the first rotation detector 81e, the signal level of the second rotation detector 81f”). Thus, the pattern of changes in the signal level of the first rotation detector 81e and the signal level of the second rotation detector 81f is different between the right rotation and the left rotation. Thereby, the production control microcomputer 100 determines in which direction the rotation operation unit 812 is rotated by performing a process of determining in what pattern these detection signals change. To do.

  Further, as shown in (a), when the right position is rotated, the protrusion 8151 of the protrusion 8150 on the cover plate 815 is continuously formed on the dial base 816 when the click position changes according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 812. The first change pattern “H, H” → “L, H” and “L, L” → One of two types of change patterns occurs, with the second change pattern “H, L”. As a result, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a process of determining that the rotation operation is performed clockwise by one click position when these two types of change patterns occur during the clockwise rotation. The reason for making such a determination is that, as described above, when the projection 8151 passes the apex of the convex portion between the concave portions, the projection 8151 is guided to the bottom of the next concave portion unless it is rotated in the reverse direction. This is because it can be determined that the rotation operation for one click has been performed when the projection 8151 passes through the apex of the convex portion between the concave portions. Here, for example, 24 click positions are provided, and the rotation operation for one click position is the rotation operation of 15 degrees as the rotation angle around the rotation center.

  On the other hand, as shown in (b), when the left position is rotated, the projection 8151 of the cover plate 815 is continuously formed on the dial base 816 when the click position changes according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812. When passing through the vertices of the convex portions at the intermediate points between the click positions, the first change pattern “H, H” → “L, H” and “L, L” → “H, L” ”Occurs in the second change pattern. As a result, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a process of determining that the leftward rotation is performed by one click position when these two types of change patterns are generated during the left rotation. The reason for making such a determination is the same reason as the determination reason at the time of right rotation.

  It should be noted that, based on the change in the signal level when the projection 8151 of the cover plate 815 enters the bottom of each recess in the dial base 816, it is determined that the rotation operation has been performed by one click position (same for the left and right rotation operations). It may be. For example, at the time of right rotation in FIG. 31A, a first change pattern “H, L” → “L, L” and a second change pattern “H, L” → “H, H” Since one of the two types of change patterns occurs, it is determined that the rotation operation has been performed clockwise by one click position when such a signal level change occurs. In addition, during the left rotation of FIG. 31B, a first change pattern “L, L” → “L, H” and a second change pattern “H, H” → “H, L” Since one of the two types of change patterns occurs, it is determined that the rotation operation has been performed to the left by one click position when such a signal level change occurs.

  FIG. 32 is a table showing a rotation determination table used for the production control microcomputer 100 to determine the rotation direction and the rotation amount based on the detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f. It is a figure shown by. The rotation determination table is stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, and is read and used to determine the rotation direction and the rotation amount.

  In the production control microcomputer 100, the level of the detection signal of each of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f is confirmed at a predetermined cycle, and when the confirmation is confirmed, the detection signal confirmed this time is confirmed. The present determination data indicating the level of the above is stored in the RAM as the previous determination data. Each time the level of the detection signal is newly confirmed, processing for updating the previous determination data is performed. If the previous determination data is stored in this manner, the determination of the rotation direction and the determination of the rotation amount as described above can be performed based on the relationship between the previous determination data and the current determination data. For example, as shown in FIG. 32, when the previous determination data is “H, H” and the current determination data is a change pattern “L, H”, it is determined that the rotation direction is right rotation and the rotation amount is 15 degrees. Is done. Similarly, when the previous determination data is “L, L” and the current determination data is a change pattern “H, L”, it is determined that the rotation direction is right rotation and the rotation amount is 15 degrees. When the previous determination data is “H, L” and the current determination data is a change pattern of “L, L”, it is determined that the rotation direction is counterclockwise and the rotation amount is 15 degrees. Similarly, when the previous determination data is “L, H” and the current determination data is a change pattern “H, H”, it is determined that the rotation direction is counterclockwise and the rotation amount is 15 degrees.

  In addition, a change pattern in which the previous determination data is “H, L” and the current determination data is “L, L”, a change pattern in which the previous determination data is “H, L” and the current determination data is “H, H”, and the previous determination For each of the change pattern in which the data is “L, L” and the current determination data is “L, H” and the change pattern in which the previous determination data is “H, H” and the current determination data is “H, L”, As described above, since the signal level changes when the projection 8151 of the cover plate 815 enters the bottom of each concave portion of the dial base 816, in this embodiment, the amount corresponding to one click position is obtained for the reason described above. Only the rotation amount, that is, the rotation amount is not determined to be 15 degrees.

  Next, the timing when the operation of the operation unit 81 is requested and the display operation performed in the effect display device according to the operation of the operation unit 81 will be described. FIG. 33 is a display screen diagram showing an image displayed on the variable display device 9 when the effect mode is selectable.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, among the effects performed in the variable display device 9, an effect mode for displaying a background image of a decorative design can be selected from a plurality of predetermined effect modes. There are three types of effect modes, such as effect mode A (for example, mountain effect mode), effect mode B (for example, night sky effect mode), and effect mode C (for example, sea effect mode). Yes. In the initial state after starting up the pachinko gaming machine 1 (after turning on the power), the production mode is selected as one of the three production modes, such as the production mode A, for example. As shown below, according to the operation of the operation unit 81, it is possible to select (change the selection) an effect mode desired by the player.

  33A, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 901, 902, and 903 are stopped and displayed, and the background image of the effect mode A is displayed as the background image. . If the condition that any one of the direction selection operation and the determination operation is performed by the pressing operation unit 811 when the variable display device 9 does not perform the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, (b ), An effect mode selection acceptance image that is an image indicating that the selection of the effect mode is accepted is displayed. In the effect mode selection acceptance image, an operation guidance display for explaining how to operate the operation unit 81 is performed in selecting the effect mode. For example, in (b), a display for explaining that the effect mode is selected by rotating the rotation operation unit 812 to select the effect mode item and pressing the center of the pressing operation unit 811 is performed. Yes. In the effect mode selection acceptance image, decorative symbols 901, 902, and 903 are reduced and displayed in the lower right area of the display screen.

  After the effect mode selection acceptance image is displayed for a predetermined period, as shown in (c), an image showing three effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C that can be selected is displayed. Further, in this case, the operation guidance display is displayed on the variable display device 9 and, in the operation unit 81, the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light so that characters such as “Turn!” Are displayed on the pressing operation unit 811. The row is lit up and a display prompting the player to operate the rotation operation unit 812 is made. When the rotation operation unit 812 is rotated while such image display or operation unit display is being performed, the item of the effect mode to be selected according to the rotation operation can be changed. For example, selectable effect modes as shown in (c) are displayed as icon images 904 to 906 corresponding to each effect mode, and icon images corresponding to the currently selected effect mode (904 in the case of (c)). In the case of (d), 905) is displayed in a specific color (hereinafter referred to as a selected color) so that it can be identified in relation to an icon image corresponding to an unselected effect mode. Is done. Thereby, the selected production mode is specified. Thus, an image that specifies the selected effect mode is referred to as an effect mode selection image. When the rotation operation unit 812 is rotated in this way, as shown in (d), the icon image to be the selected color is sequentially changed according to the rotation operation, and the item of the effect mode to be selected can be changed. it can. In the initial stage where the display of (c) is performed, the currently selected icon image is set as the selection color, and then the icon image set as the selection color is changed according to the rotation operation.

  When the rotation operation unit 812 performs a left rotation operation, a display for selecting an effect mode is performed in the order of effect mode A → effect mode B → effect mode C → effect mode A. . When a clockwise rotation operation is performed, a display for selecting an effect mode is performed in the order of effect mode A → effect mode C → effect mode B → effect mode A. When a rotation operation is performed by the rotation operation unit 812, the operation unit center lamp 82A emits red light in the operation unit 81, and a character string such as “Press!” Blinks on the pressing operation unit 811. The player is prompted to operate the pressing operation unit 811.

  And if the center part of the press operation part 811 is pressed, according to the press operation, the selected production mode will be determined as a production mode to be selected from now on, and the production selected as shown in (d). An effect mode determination image for displaying a message indicating that the mode has been determined is displayed. Thereafter, a background image corresponding to the determined effect mode is displayed as shown in (e). In addition, when the condition for starting the variable display is established at a stage before the production mode is determined, the production mode is not changed, and the production mode selected before the production mode reception image is displayed is continued. The When the condition for starting the variable display is established at the stage before the effect mode is determined, it is determined that the effect mode selected in the effect mode selection image at that time is selected as a new effect mode. It may be.

  The condition for enabling selection of such an effect mode is that any one of the direction selection operation and the determination operation is performed by the pressing operation unit 811 when the variable display device 9 does not perform the variable display of the decorative symbols. It is established when Therefore, the player can change the effect mode at a time that he / she likes, and can change the mood by changing the effect mode and continue the game.

  As described above, the player can arbitrarily select the effect mode according to his / her preference from a plurality of types of effect modes based on the operation of the operation unit 81, so that the degree of freedom of effect display is increased. , You can improve the fun of the game.

  Each of FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 is a display screen diagram showing an image displayed on the variable display device 9 when it is determined to be a specific type of reach called chance reach. FIG. 34 shows an image when the effect display of super reach is performed in the reach display mode by performing the change display with the change pattern of reach F, and FIG. 35 shows the change in the change pattern of reach E. An image when the super reach effect display is not performed in the reach display mode by the display is shown.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the reach display mode effect display (hereinafter referred to as reach effect display) is performed on the variable display device 9, an operation display in which the effect display changes according to the operation of the operation unit 81 is performed. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 (a), when the left decorative design 901 and the right decorative design 903 stop at the same design while the center decorative design 902 is changing, the reach state is reached and the reach effect display is performed. In each of the above reach E and reach F, a reach rotation operation request image for requesting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is displayed as a reach effect display as shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. . In the reach rotation operation request image, if an image indicating a predetermined situation is displayed in response to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812, it indicates that it will be super reach (“Please operate the rotation ring and shoot! In this case, an operation guidance display for explaining how to operate the operation unit 81 is performed. Further, in this case, in the operation unit 81, the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light so that a character string such as “Turn!” Is lit on the pressing operation unit 811, and the rotation operation unit is displayed to the player. A display prompting an operation 812 is performed.

  Then, after the operation guidance display is performed for a predetermined period, an image for performing an air hockey mini game as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 (c) and (d) is displayed. When the rotation operation unit 812 is rotated while the image is displayed, a mallet 908 as a hitting tool for hitting the pack 907 is shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. An operation display (for example, a display in which the mallet 908 operates on a predetermined circumference in accordance with the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812) is performed, and within a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) according to the operation. A mini game of the type in which the player side (side where only the mallet 908 is displayed) and the pachinko gaming machine 1 side (side where the character 909 is displayed) competes in an air hockey game is performed.

  In the mini-game, as shown in (c) and (d), the scores of both players who compete are displayed as the game progresses ((c) in FIG. 34 and (c) and (d in FIG. 35). ), The player side has 0 points and the pachinko gaming machine 1 side has 5 points, and in FIG. 34D, the player side has 1 point and the pachinko gaming machine 1 side has 5 points), and the remaining time of the game is also displayed ( 34 (c) and FIG. 35 (c), 7 seconds, FIG. 34 (d) 3 seconds, FIG. 35 (d) 0 seconds). In such a mini game, when the player has scored before the predetermined time elapses (for example, when one score is obtained as shown in FIG. 34 (d)), in FIG. 34 (e) After the fact that the super reach has been displayed as shown, a press operation request image at the time of super reach requesting the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 811 is displayed as shown in (f). In the case of the variation pattern in reach F, the effect display contents are determined in advance so that display regarding the situation of the mini game and super reach is performed, and the super reach display as shown in FIG. When it becomes a mode, a condition for displaying the effect of super reach is established.

  On the other hand, in such a mini game, when the player does not score before the predetermined time elapses (for example, as shown in FIG. 35D), or until the predetermined time elapses. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has scored (not shown), a message indicating that the normal reach has been reached is displayed as shown in FIG. In the case of the variation pattern in reach E, the effect display contents are determined in advance so that display regarding such a mini game situation and normal reach is performed.

  In the press operation request image at the time of super reach as shown in (f) of FIG. 34, the press operation unit 811 is pressed to display an image indicating a predetermined situation (“please save power by hitting the button repeatedly” ! ”), An operation guidance display for explaining how to operate the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 is performed. In this case, in the operation unit 81, the operation unit center lamp 82 </ b> A emits red light so that a character string such as “Press!” Flashes on the pressing operation unit 811, so A display prompting the operation 811 is displayed.

  It should be noted that when displaying a press operation request image during super reach, the rotary operation unit 812 is rotated to display an image indicating a predetermined situation ("turn the jog dial to save power!"). Accordingly, an operation guidance display explaining how to operate the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 may be performed. Further, in this case, in the operation unit 81, the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light so that a character string such as “Turn !!!!” is lit on the pressing operation unit 811. A display prompting the user to perform the operation 812 may be performed.

  Then, after the operation guidance display is performed for a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 34 (g), the value of the power displayed in the bar graph format increases as the number of pressing operations of the pressing operation unit 811 increases. A chance display is performed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIGS. 34 (h) and 34 (i), an effect display for determining a stop symbol for the center ornament symbol is performed according to the accumulated power. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the big hit display result is displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (j), while when it is determined to be a big hit, the lost display result is displayed. As shown in (h) and (i) of FIG. 34, the effect display image for determining the stop symbol of the center ornament symbol displayed in accordance with the accumulated power is a jackpot display result as the accumulated power is larger. It is desirable to make the image reminiscent of becoming.

  As described above, the player can be involved in the progress of the effect display such as the reach display mode based on the operation of the operation unit 81, so that the game effect mode is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Can be made.

  FIG. 36 is a display screen diagram showing an image displayed on the variable display device 9 when it is determined to have a predetermined type of reach called character selection reach.

  As shown in (a), after reaching the reach state, as a reach effect display, as shown in (b), a direction selection operation of the pressing operation unit 811 for selecting a character within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). A reach direction selection operation request image for requesting is displayed. In the reach direction selection operation request image, an operation guidance display is provided to explain how to operate the operation unit 81 in selecting a character. For example, in (b), a display explaining that a character item is selected by a direction selection operation by the pressing operation unit 811 within a predetermined time is displayed. In the reach direction selection operation request image, decorative symbols 901, 902, and 903 are reduced and displayed in the upper right area of the display screen. Further, the remaining time during which the character can be selected is displayed in the lower right area of the display screen.

  In the reach direction selection operation request image, images indicating four characters A to D that can be selected are displayed. In this case, in the operation unit 81, the first pressing operation unit lamp 81a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 81d are caused to emit light, and a display for prompting the player to perform a selection operation by the pressing operation unit 811 is performed. When the direction selection operation is performed by the pressing operation unit 811 while such an image display or operation unit display is performed, the item of the character to be selected can be changed according to the direction selection operation. For example, selectable characters such as (b) are displayed as icon images 910 to 913 corresponding to the respective characters, and icon images corresponding to the currently selected character (910 and (c in the case of (b)). ) Is displayed in a specific color (hereinafter referred to as a selected color), so that it can be identified in relation to an icon image corresponding to a non-selected effect mode. Thereby, the selected character is specified. In this manner, an image that identifies the selected character is referred to as a character selection image.

  When the direction selection operation is performed by the pressing operation unit 811, as shown in (c), the icon image as the selection color is sequentially changed according to the direction selection operation, and the item of the character to be selected can be changed. . When a predetermined time elapses, the character selected at that time is determined as the character to be selected, and a message indicating that the selected character has been determined is displayed as shown in (c). A character selection decision image is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (d), the determined character C is displayed in the reach effect display.

  In this way, the player can arbitrarily select a character from a plurality of types of characters according to his / her preference based on the operation of the operation unit 81, so that the degree of freedom of effect display is increased, and the game Can improve the interest of

  Next, the ground wiring connection in the gaming machine and the card unit 50 will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a circuit diagram showing a wiring state of the ground board, the card unit side board, and a part of the gaming machine side board. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing a configuration in the ground substrate. As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the ground substrate 1000 has a connector CN1 for connecting one external connection ground connected to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine installation island) and grounded, and the gaming machine main body. Connector CN2 for connecting one FG harness to be connected to the terminal, and two ground boards connected to a lending device connecting terminal board 66 such as a game ball (the same board as the interface board 66 shown in FIG. 20) A connector CN3 for connecting the harness is provided. Then, in the ground substrate 1000, as shown in FIG. 38, the wiring 1001 from the connector CN1 and the wiring 1002 from the connector CN2 are connected at the connection point, and the two wirings 1003 and 1004 from the connector CN3 are connected. The connection points of the wirings 1001 and 1002 and the connection points of the wirings 1003 and 1004 are connected by the wiring 1005.

  In the gaming machine, the game balls pass from the installation island through the ball tank 38 and from the ball tank 38 through the supply ball guide passage (tank rail) 160 to the ball payout device 97 and from the ball payout device 97 to the guide rod (guide rod 430 shown in FIG. 39). ) Through the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 350, the hitting ball supply tray 350 through the hitting rail to the game area, and the contact points between the game balls and the game balls and the game balls in the gaming machine are in contact with each other. Can generate static electricity. Also, static electricity can be generated in the card unit 50. Furthermore, there is a possibility that electric leakage occurs in the card unit 50. In such a case, static electricity or electric leakage may lead to malfunction or failure of the control unit (microcomputer or the like) in the gaming machine or the control unit in the card unit 50. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. By connecting the FG harness and the ground board harness to the ground board 1000, the gaming machine main body and the card unit 50 are both connected to the outside of the gaming machine and grounded.

  Here, in the ground board 1000, the external connection ground and the FG harness are connected, and the external connection ground and the ground board harness are connected to the grounding wiring of the gaming machine main body to the game machine installation operator. This is to make sure that the connection is made and to reduce the wiring work when installing the gaming machine.

  That is, conventionally, no grounding board is provided, and the card unit 50 (that is, a gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 66 having terminals (connectors) for wiring connection of the card unit 50 to other boards). And the gaming machine main body are connected by two FG harnesses, and the gaming machine main body and the outside of the gaming machine are connected by an external connection ground. In this case, when installing the gaming machine, the gaming machine installation operator needs to connect (wiring) the card unit 50 and the gaming machine main body and connect (wiring) the gaming machine main body and the outside of the gaming machine. There is. For this reason, it may occur that the wiring connection between the card unit 50 and the gaming machine main body or the wiring connection between the gaming machine main body and the gaming machine main body is forgotten. In addition, the wiring work for installing a large number of gaming machines also increases.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, in this embodiment, a grounding board 1000 is provided, an external connection ground from the outside of the game, an FG harness from the gaming machine main body, and a ground from the card unit 50. Since the wiring harness is connected (wired) to the grounding board 1000 and the wiring is connected to the grounding board 1000, the installation operator connects the grounding board 1000 and the game machine main body with the FG harness (wiring). ) Just do it. This is because, unlike a gaming machine, the card unit 50 is not a device that is frequently replaced, but is installed (fixed) in advance, so that the card unit 50 and the ground substrate 1000 are already connected (wired). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of wiring work for the game machine installation operator and to make sure that the ground wiring connection of the gaming machine main body is performed.

  In addition, when changing the model of a gaming machine, only the gaming board 6 is generally replaced. In this embodiment, the ground wire (FG harness) that connects the ground substrate 1000 and the gaming machine main body is connected to the mechanism plate 105 on the gaming machine side. If the ground wire is connected to the game board 6, the ground wire must be connected to the game board 6 every time the model is changed, and the installer may forget to connect the ground wire. However, since the ground wire is connected to the mechanism plate 105, it is not necessary to connect the ground wire to the gaming machine when changing the model of the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the surge absorber 1100 is disposed on the wiring 1002 from the connector CN2 in the ground substrate 1000. A surge absorber (also referred to as a surge protector) is an element used to protect equipment and facilities from surges generated by lightning, switching, electrostatic discharge, etc., that is, transient excessive voltage. An induced lightning surge caused by a lightning strike, an open / close surge generated by opening / closing a switch or a relay, an electrostatic surge, etc. all cause malfunction of the device or destruction of internal components or the device itself. For this reason, a surge absorber is used to absorb and limit the surge voltage so as not to affect the circuit.

  A surge absorber is a voltage-dependent element and has a high resistance in a normal state, but limits the voltage by rapidly decreasing the resistance when the applied voltage exceeds a certain voltage. The operation at this time includes a clamping type that works to keep the voltage at a constant value, and a switching type that rapidly conducts when the voltage exceeds a predetermined value and greatly reduces the voltage across the element. There is.

  Examples of the clamping type include a varistor (metal oxide varistor) and a Zener diode. The varistor is a voltage-dependent resistance element, and exhibits high resistance when the voltage is small. However, when a voltage higher than a specified voltage is applied, the varistor becomes conductive and a large current flows. Examples of the switching type include discharge tubes and thyristors. A discharge type (gap type) such as a gas surge arrester has a structure in which a discharge electrode is opposed to a glass or ceramic hermetic container and air or an inert gas (for example, nitrogen gas) is filled therebetween. Although it is an open state in a normal state, when a surge voltage is applied, an arc discharge occurs between the electrodes, and a short circuit is caused to limit the surge voltage.

  The reason why the surge absorber 1100 is disposed on the wiring 1002 from the connector CN2 on the gaming machine main body side in the ground substrate 1000 is to absorb a surge voltage based on the charging (static electricity) of the gaming ball in the gaming machine. Further, if the gaming machine and the card unit 50 are configured to be connected to the ground in the ground substrate 1000 in common, a surge voltage (100V in case of electric leakage, several in the case of static electricity) based on electric leakage or electrostatic noise from the card unit 50 side. This is because kV) may flow into the gaming machine side and prevent such surge voltage from flowing into the gaming machine side. When leakage or electrostatic noise occurs in the card unit 50, the surge voltage is transmitted to the ground substrate 1000 through the ground substrate harness. At this time, if the surge absorber 1100 is not provided on the ground substrate 1000, the surge voltage from the card unit 50 side is transmitted to the gaming machine main body side. However, as shown in FIGS. Since the surge absorber 1100 is provided on 1000, the surge voltage is absorbed and limited by the surge absorber 1100.

  In this embodiment, the surge absorber 1100 gradually discharges the surge voltage to absorb and limit it. That is, abrupt discharge is avoided and the surge voltage is gradually discharged to absorb and limit. As described above, there are various types of surge absorbers, but it is necessary to select the type of surge absorber 1100 according to the purpose. That is, parameters (characteristics) such as voltage-current characteristics, surge resistance (current resistance or energy resistance), response time, capacitance, and leakage current differ depending on the type of surge absorber. 1100 must be selected. For example, surge absorbers designed to absorb and limit surge voltage based on leakage current, surge absorbers designed to absorb and limit surge voltage based on electrostatic noise, surge voltage based on leakage and electrostatic noise A surge absorber or the like intended to be limited is appropriately selected and placed on the ground substrate 1000. The surge absorber 1100 may be a clamping type, a switching type, or a combination of a plurality of surge absorbers.

  When the purpose is to absorb and limit the surge voltage due to the leakage of the card unit 50, the operation start voltage of the surge absorber 1100 (voltage at which the characteristic (resistance value) changes) is set to be higher than the voltage used in the gaming machine. It is preferable that the voltage be higher than the voltage used in the card unit 50. For example, in this embodiment, the voltage used in the gaming machine (the operating voltage of the microcomputers 560, 370, 100) is 24V AC, whereas the voltage used in the prepaid card unit 50 is 100V AC (note that FIG. In the configuration shown in FIG. 37, a power supply voltage of 24 V AC is supplied from the payout control board 37 to the card unit 50 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 66. The basic operating voltage of the unit 50 is 100V). In this case, the surge absorber 1100 is used such that the operation start voltage of the surge absorber 1100 is a voltage between 24V and + 100V. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent a surge voltage due to leakage from the card unit 50 side from flowing into the gaming machine side. In this embodiment, the surge absorber 1100 is detachable and replaceable.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 37, the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 66 (the same board as the interface board 66 shown in FIG. 20) includes terminals (connectors) for wiring connection of the card unit 50 to other boards. Substrate. As shown in FIG. 37, the connector CN1 of the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 66 and the connector CN3 of the ground substrate 1000 are connected by the ground substrate harness, and the connector CN2 of the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 66 and the payout control are performed. The connector CN7 of the board 37 is connected with a gaming ball lending device connection terminal board harness, and the connector CN3 of the gaming ball lending apparatus connection terminal board 66 and a balance display board (display for displaying the balance of the prepaid card (FIG. 40 and FIG. 40). 41 is connected to the connector CN1 of the board) on which the frequency display LED 93) shown in FIG. 41 is mounted by a balance display board harness, and the connector CN4 of the lending device connection terminal board 66 such as a game ball and the connector (not shown) of the card unit 50 Are connected by a plurality of signal lines (harnesses).

  It should be noted that signals input / output between the connector CN4 of the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 66 and the connector (not shown) of the card unit 50 (that is, signals transmitted and received between the gaming machine and the card unit 50). ): AC24V power supply, PSI signal (connection confirmation signal), SEGA signal to SEGG signal (7 segment A signal to 7 segment G signal; referred to as display data signal), LG (DC + 18V power supply ground), TDLO signal (ball rental) Display signal), BRDY signal (card unit READY signal), EXS signal (pachinko machine lending completion signal), PRDY signal (pachinko machine READY signal), DG1 signal to DG3 signal (first digit 7-segment LED common signal to 3 digits) LED common signal; called strobe signal), VL (DC + 18V power supply), TDS signal ( Allowance operation signal), RES signal (return operation signal), BRQ signal (sphere loan request completion confirmation signal), FG (frame ground; ground), and has a AC24V power. Details of the connection relationship between the gaming machine and the card unit 50 will be described later (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

  The connector CN1 of the payout control board 37 and the connector CN2 of the power supply board 910 are connected by a payout control board power harness, and the connector CN2 of the payout control board 37 and the main control board (main board 31) are connected by a plurality of signal lines. The connector CN3 of the payout control board 37 and the connector CN3 of the plastic frame relay board are connected by the plastic frame relay board harness, and the connector CN4 of the payout control board 37 and the connector CN1 of the payout relay board are the payout relay board harness. The connector CN5 of the payout control board 37 and the connector CN3 of the sunpack relay board are connected by a sunpack relay board harness, and the connector CN6 of the payout control board 37 and the inspection device are connected by a plurality of signal lines (harnesses). Has been.

  Further, the connector CN1 of the plastic frame relay board and the full tank switch are connected by a full tank switch harness, and the connector CN2 of the plastic frame relay board and the connector CN2 of the launch control board 91A are connected by a launch control board harness. The connector CN2 of the launch control board 91A is connected to the launch lever (touch sensor) and the single launch switch harness by a single launch switch harness, and the connector CN3 of the launch control board 91A is connected to the launch motor by a launch motor harness. . Further, the connector CN1 of the sunpack relay board and the ball break switch 197 are connected by a ball break switch harness, and the connector CN2 of the sunpack relay board and the door opening switches 1 and 2 are connected by a door switch harness.

  Further, the connector CN2 of the payout relay board and the payout number count switch are connected by the payout number count switch harness, the connector CN3 of the payout relay board and the connector CN1 of the payout sensor board are connected by the payout sensor harness, and The connector CN4 and the payout motor are connected by a payout motor harness.

  Further, the connector CN1 of the power supply board 910 and the power supply (AV24V) are connected by a power cord, the connector CN3 of the power supply board 910 and the main control board (main board 31) are connected by a main control board power supply harness, and the power supply board 910 is connected. The connector CN4 and the frame serial relay board are connected by a frame serial relay board power harness, and the connector CN5 of the power board 910 and the effect control board 80 are connected by an effect control board power harness.

  FIG. 39 is a connection diagram showing each member attached to the mechanism board together with the ball striking rail, the ground substrate, and the card unit. In the configuration shown in FIG. 39, the ball striking rails (the firing rail 440, the outer rail 441 and the inner rail 442) are made of stainless steel, and the firing rail 440, the outer rail 441 and the inner rail 442 are used when a game is performed. Electrically conducting. Although not shown in FIG. 39, the passage 350A of the plate portion 350 shown in FIG. 9 is also made of stainless steel and is electrically connected to the firing rail 440 and the like.

  The guide rod 430 is a member that guides the game ball paid out from the ball payout device 97 to a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 provided on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The induction rod 430 is made of carbon resin and is in contact with the ground plate 431. The firing rail 440 (or the passage 350A) and the guide rod 430 are connected by a wiring 2008 via a hinge portion 312 (see FIG. 9). In addition, the guide rod 430 is connected to a receiving metal fitting 411 connected to the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105 by a wiring 2007. The metal fitting 410 and the receiving metal fitting 411 are made of stainless steel. Therefore, the potential of the hitting rail and the guide rod 430 is the same as the potential of the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105.

  The ball tank 38 is made of carbon resin, and a ground plate 381 is attached to a part of the ball tank 38. The ball tank 38 is connected to the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105 by wiring 2005. Therefore, the potential of the ball tank 38 is the same as the potential of the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105.

  The case cover 731 is made of polycarbonate. A stainless steel presser fitting 732 is in contact with the case cover 731. Further, the presser fitting 732 is connected to the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105 by the wiring 2006. Therefore, the potential of the case cover 731 is the same as the potential of the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105.

  Therefore, the potential of the batting rail which becomes the passage of the game ball launched from the launcher, the ball tank 38 which is the main part of the passage of the game ball to be paid out, the ball passage in the ball payout device 97 and the guide rod 430 is It is the same as the potential of the metal fitting 410 of 105.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the metal fitting 410 is connected to the outside of the gaming machine (installed island) via the earth substrate 1000 and is grounded. That is, the metal fitting 410 and the ground substrate 1000 are connected by the wiring 2004 (FG harness), and the ground substrate 1000 and the outside of the gaming machine (installed island) are connected by the wiring 2001 (external connection ground). Therefore, the potentials of the hitting rail, the ball tank 38, the ball passage in the ball dispensing device 97, the guide rod 430, and the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105 are at the ground level. As described above, the surge absorber 1100 is provided on the path from the gaming machine main body (the metal fitting 410 of the mechanism plate 105) to the outside of the gaming machine in the ground substrate 1000. The surge absorber 1100 can gradually discharge and absorb static electricity based on the charging of game balls in the gaming machine.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the card unit 50 is connected to the outside of the gaming machine via an interface board (game ball rental device connecting terminal board) 66 and a ground board 1000 and is grounded. That is, the card unit 50 and the interface board 66 are connected by the wiring 2002, the interface board 66 and the ground board 1000 are connected by the wiring 2003 (earth board harness), and the ground board 1000 and the game are connected by the wiring 2001 (external connection ground). It is connected to the outside of the aircraft (installed island). Further, the card unit 50 is connected to a power outlet outside the gaming machine by a wiring 2000 (external connection ground) different from the wirings 2002 and 2003. That is, the card unit 50 is grounded by the wiring 2000 built in the cord of the power outlet. As described above, since the card unit 50 is grounded by the route of the wiring 2000 different from the route of the wirings 2002, 2003, and 2001, the card unit 50 and the ground substrate 1000 are not connected by the wiring 2002 or 2003. Even in the case where the wiring 2002 or 2003 is disconnected, the card unit 50 can be grounded. Further, even when the ground board 1000 and the outside of the gaming machine are not connected by the wiring 2001 (including the case where the wiring 2001 is disconnected), the card unit 50 can be grounded, and the gaming machine body can also be connected to the wiring 2004, 2003. , 2002, 2000 can be grounded. In the configuration shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the surge absorber 1100 is disposed on the wiring 1002 on the ground substrate 1000. As long as it is on the path up to (on the wiring 2004 in FIG. 39), it may be arranged at any location.

  In the example shown in FIG. 39, the metal fitting 410 and the earth substrate 1000 are connected by the wiring 2004. However, instead of the metal fitting 410, the ball tank 38 and the earth substrate 1000 may be connected by the wiring 2004. Good. In this case, since the rapid discharge can be avoided by the resistance of the carbon resin of the ball tank 38, it is preferable as the connection of the ground wiring.

  Next, the connection relationship between the gaming machine and the card unit 50 will be described. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the card unit. FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing a connection relationship among the interface board 66, the card unit 50, and the payout control board 37.

  On the front face of the card unit 50, a multi-function lamp 2070, a bill insertion slot (not shown), a coin insertion slot (not shown), a coin return button (not shown), a coin return slot (not shown), a prepaid A card insertion slot (not shown) is provided. Further, inside the card unit 50, as shown in FIG. 40, a lamp drive circuit 2011, a bill discriminator 2040, a coin discriminator 2050, an LED drive circuit 2012, a detection circuit 2013, a unit controller 2020, a card R / W A control unit 2030, a card R / W 2080, and the like are provided.

  The lamp driving circuit 2011 is a circuit for controlling the light emission of the multi-function lamp 2070. Based on the input of the light emission control command from the unit control unit 2020, the lamp driving circuit 2011 outputs a signal for instructing the light emission mode according to the command. By outputting to the multi-function lamp 2070, the multi-function lamp 2070 is controlled to emit light. The multi-function lamp 2070 is a lamp for informing the operating state of the card unit 50. Here, the green lamp is lit to notify that the prepaid card is not being accepted, and the blue lamp is lit to accept the prepaid card. Notify that there is.

  The LED drive circuit 2012 is a circuit for controlling lighting of the ball lendable LED 61 and the frequency display LED 93. The LED drive circuit 2012 is configured to send a signal for instructing a lighting mode according to the command between the LED drive circuit 2012 and the ball lendable LED 61 based on the input of the command for lighting control from the unit control unit 2020. Is output via a ball lending display signal line, which is a signal line for connecting the ball lending LED 61, and lighting control of the ball lending lend LED 61 is performed. The LED drive circuit 2012 also displays the strobe signals (DG1 to DG3) and the display data signals (SEGA to SEGG) corresponding to the command based on the frequency display command input from the unit controller 2020. By outputting to the LED 93, the frequency display of the frequency display LED 93 is controlled.

  The detection circuit 2013 is a circuit for detecting the operation of the ball lending switch 91 and the return switch 92. In the detection circuit 2013, the ball lending operation signal output when the ball lending switch 91 is operated is input via the ball lending operation signal line connecting the ball lending switch 91 and the detection circuit 2013. Based on this, a signal indicating that a ball lending operation has been performed is output to the unit controller 2020. Further, the detection circuit 2013 is based on the fact that the return operation signal output when the return switch 92 is operated is input via the return operation signal line connecting the return switch 92 and the detection circuit 2013. Then, a signal indicating that a return operation has been performed is output to the unit controller 2020.

  The unit control unit 2020 includes a CPU 2021, a ROM 2022, a RAM 2023, an I / O 2024, and the like. A processing program recorded in the ROM 2022 is executed by the CPU 2021 using the RAM 2023 as a work area, thereby connecting to the unit control unit 2020. Various operations are performed by controlling the operation of each component.

  When the prepaid card is received by the card R / W 2080, the card R / W control unit 2030 issues a verification request including the remaining card amount read from the prepaid card to the system controller (a hall computer that manages sales provided in the hall). Process to send to. Further, the card R / W control unit 2030 performs a process of transmitting payment information including an identification amount to the system controller when a deposit process is performed in the card unit 50. Further, the card R / W control unit 2030 performs processing for transmitting information identifying the gaming machine sent from the unit control unit 2020 to the system controller.

  Card R / W 2080 is a device that accepts insertion of a prepaid card from a prepaid card insertion slot and reads the remaining amount of the card from the prepaid card. The bill validator 2040 is a device that accepts the insertion of bills and identifies the amount received. The coin discriminator 2050 is a device that accepts coin insertion and identifies the amount of money received.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, signal lines connecting the gaming machine and the card unit 50 will be described. Since the ball lending display signal line, the ball lending operation signal line, and the return operation signal line have been described above, description thereof will be omitted.

  The strobe signal line is a signal line for transmitting a strobe signal for controlling the lighting of the frequency display LED 93 from the card unit 50 to the gaming machine. The strobe signal line is connected to the LED drive circuit 2012 on the card unit 50 side, and is connected to the frequency display LED 93 via the interface board 66 on the gaming machine side, as a DG1 signal line, a DG2 signal line, and a DG3 signal line. Three signal lines.

  The display data signal line is a signal line for transmitting a display data signal for controlling the lighting of the frequency display LED 93 from the card unit 50 to the gaming machine. This display data signal line is connected to the LED drive circuit 2012 on the card unit 50 side and SEGA signal line, SEGB signal line, SEGC signal line connected to the frequency display LED 93 via the interface board 66 on the gaming machine side. , SEGD signal line, SEGE signal line, SEGF signal line, and SEGG signal line.

  The PSI signal line is a signal line for confirming the connection between the card unit 50 and the gaming machine. This PSI signal line is a signal line connected to the I / O 2024 of the unit controller 2020 on the card unit 50 side, and connected to the I / O 372 of the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 on the gaming machine side. is there. By transmitting the connection confirmation signal via the PSI signal line, the launch handle 5 can be operated in the gaming machine.

  The PRDY signal line is a signal line for transmitting from the gaming machine to the card unit 50 a payable signal indicating that communication between the gaming machine and the card unit 50 is possible (standby state). . This PRDY signal line is a signal line connected to the I / O 372 of the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 on the gaming machine side and connected to the I / O 2024 of the unit control unit 2020 on the card unit 50 side. is there.

  The BRDY signal line is a signal line for transmitting a ball lending possible signal from the card unit 50 to the gaming machine when there is a ball lending operation in a standby state where the card unit 50 is receiving a payable signal. is there. The BRDY signal line is a signal line for transmitting a ball lending end signal from the card unit 50 to the gaming machine when the ball lending process for the set frequency (for example, 5 times) is completed. This BRDY signal line is a signal line connected to the I / O 2024 of the unit controller 2020 on the card unit 50 side, and connected to the I / O 372 of the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 on the gaming machine side. is there.

  The BRQ signal line sends a unit lending request signal from the card unit 50 to the gaming machine for lending (lending) gaming balls (pachinko balls) corresponding to the size of the unit valuable value (that is, several minutes). This is a signal line for transmission. Further, the BRQ signal line is a signal line for transmitting a unit lending command signal for instructing lending of gaming balls for one or more times from the card unit 50 to the gaming machine. This BRQ signal line is a signal line connected to the I / O 2024 of the unit control unit 2020 on the card unit 50 side, and connected to the I / O 372 of the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 on the gaming machine side. is there.

  The EXS signal line is a signal line for transmitting from the gaming machine to the card unit 50 a unit lending preparation signal indicating that preparation for lending of game balls for several times is ready. The EXS signal line is a signal line for transmitting a unit completion signal indicating that lending of game balls for one number of times has been completed from the gaming machine to the card unit 50. This EXS signal line is a signal line connected to the I / O 372 of the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 on the gaming machine side, and connected to the I / O 2024 of the unit control unit 2020 on the card unit 50 side. is there.

  The ground wire (ground substrate harness shown in FIG. 37) is a signal wire for connecting and grounding the card unit 50 to the outside of the gaming machine. As described above, the game machine side is connected to the ground board 1000 (connector CN3) via the interface board 66, and the card unit side 50 is connected to each part (unit control unit 2020, etc.) of the card unit 50. Signal line.

  Next, the configuration of the power supply substrate 110 will be described. FIG. 42 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit configuration in the power supply board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 42, the power supply voltage AC24V is input to the connector CN1 of the power supply board 910. As shown in FIG. 42, a fuse 911 is connected in series to the other terminal of connector CN1 (“2” of connector CN1 shown in FIG. 37). In addition, a varistor 912, a capacitor 913, and a transformer 916 are sequentially connected between both terminals of the connector CN1. Two power thermistors 914 and 915 are connected between the other terminal side of the capacitor 913 and the other terminal side of the transformer 916.

  As described above, the varistor 912 is an element that is high resistance and does not flow current in a normal state (when the voltage is below a certain voltage), but starts to flow suddenly when a voltage exceeding a certain voltage is applied. . The power thermistors 914 and 915 are elements whose resistance values change with temperature, and the resistance decreases as the temperature increases.

  Conventionally, only the fuse 911 is provided without providing a circuit including the varistor 912, the capacitor 913, and the power thermistors 914 and 915. However, if the voltage input from the connector CN1 is too high (for example, when an AC 100V power supply is accidentally connected), an excessive current flows in the circuit in the power supply board 910 before the fuse 911 is burned out. Therefore, there is a problem that the circuit element is broken. Therefore, in this embodiment, a circuit including a varistor 912, a capacitor 913, and a power thermistor 914, 915 is provided so that the fuse 911 is surely blown when the voltage input from the connector CN1 is too high. Specifically, since the power thermistors 914 and 915 do not flow current unless the temperature rises, the power thermistors 914 and 915 do not generate heat even when a power supply voltage of AC 100V is suddenly input, and the current flows to the transformer 916 side. Not flowing. When the power supply voltage reaches a certain voltage value, the varistor 912 conducts and starts to flow current. As a result, the fuse 911 is burned out and the input of the power supply voltage from the connector CN1 is stopped. By having such a circuit configuration, even if a 100V power supply is mistakenly connected to the connector CN1 (mainly at a cold start when a wiring connection error occurs when installing a gaming machine), it is reliable. In addition, it is possible to prevent an excessive current from flowing to the elements of the internal circuit of the power supply substrate 910, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the power supply circuit from being destroyed.

  The power supply circuit mounted on the power supply board 910 shown in FIG. 42 generates a voltage used by each board and mechanism component in the gaming machine. In this example, AC24V, VSL (DC + 30V), VDD (DC + 12V), and VCC (DC + 5V) are generated. The power supply circuit is divided into a plurality of systems in order to obtain a plurality of types of power supply voltages.

  First, the AC power supply (AC24V) from the connector CN1 is input to the input side (primary side) of the transformer 916. The transformer 916 is for electrically insulating the AC power supply (AC24V) and the power supply substrate 910, and its output voltage is also AC24V. The transformer 916 and the bridge circuit 931 constitute a bridge full-wave rectifier circuit, and the transformer 916 and the bridge circuit 932 constitute a different-system bridge full-wave rectifier circuit. When the bridge full-wave rectifier circuit operates, a pair of opposing diodes in the bridge circuits 931 and 932 conducts in the positive half cycle, while another pair of opposing diodes in the bridge circuits 931 and 932 in the negative half cycle. Conduct. As a result, the AC waveform of the power supply is converted into a full-wave rectified waveform.

  Next, three systems of circuits 941, 942, and 943 are provided at the subsequent stage (downstream side) of the bridge circuit 931. These circuits 941, 942, and 943 are respectively a smoothing circuit composed of a smoothing capacitor (electrolytic capacitor) or the like provided at the front stage (upstream side), and a switching regulator as a constant voltage circuit provided at the rear stage (downstream side). And. The output waveform of the bridge full-wave rectifier circuit is smoothed by the smoothing circuit (pulsation is removed), and the smoothed waveform is stabilized at a constant voltage by the switching regulator.

  The voltage branched before the circuit 941 (the output voltage of the bridge circuit 931) is output to the VSL terminals (“2A” and “2B”) of the connector CN5 via the fuse 951. The output voltage from the circuit 941 is output to the VDD terminal (“2”) of the connector CN4 via the fuse 952. The output voltage from the circuit 942 is output to the VDD terminals (“3A” and “3B”) of the connector CN5 via the fuse 953. The output voltage from the circuit 943 is output via the fuse 954 to the VCC terminal (“3”) of the connector CN4 and the VCC terminal (“4A” “4B”) of the connector CN5.

  Further, two systems of circuits 944 and 945 are provided at the subsequent stage (downstream side) of the bridge circuit 932. Each of these circuits 944 and 945 includes a smoothing circuit including a smoothing capacitor (electrolytic capacitor) provided in the front stage (upstream side) and a switching regulator as a constant voltage circuit provided in the rear stage (downstream side). I have. The output waveform of the bridge full-wave rectifier circuit is smoothed by the smoothing circuit (pulsation is removed), and the smoothed waveform is stabilized at a constant voltage by the switching regulator.

  The voltage branched before the bridge circuit 932 (the output voltage of the transformer 916) is output as it is to the AC24V terminal ("2" "3") of the connector CN2. The voltage branched before the circuit 944 (the output voltage of the bridge circuit 932) is output to the VSL terminal (“5”) of the connector CN2 via the fuse 955, and also to the VSL terminal (“5”) of the connector CN3 via the fuse 956. “2A” and “2B”). The output voltage from the circuit 944 is output to the VDD terminal (“6”) of the connector CN2 via the fuse 957, and is output to the VDD terminal (“3A” “3B”) of the connector CN3 via the fuse 958. . The output voltage from the circuit 945 is output to the VCC terminal (“7”) of the connector CN2 via the fuse 959, and is output to the VCC terminal (“4A” “4B”) of the connector CN3 via the fuse 960. .

  A capacitor 922 serving as a memory holding means for holding the stored contents in the backup power supply (VBB), that is, the backup RAM (RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560) drives DC + 5V (VCC), that is, an IC on each board. It is charged from the power line. The output voltage across capacitor 922 is output to the VBB terminal (“5A”) of connector CN3. Further, a backflow preventing diode 923 is inserted between the +5 V line and the backup +5 V (VBB) line. The reference potentials are GND terminals (“1” and “4”) of the connector CN4, GND terminals of the connector CN5 (“1A”, “1B”, “5A” and “5B”), and GND terminals (“1” and “4” of the connector CN2). "8") and the GND terminal ("1A" "1B" "6A" "6B") of the connector CN3. Further, the connector CN3 is provided with a terminal (“5B”) connected to the clear switch 921. When the clear switch 921 is not pressed, a high level signal is output, and when the clear switch 921 is pressed, a low level signal is output.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the connector CN2 is a connector for supplying power to the payout control board 37, the connector CN3 is a connector for supplying power to the main board 31, and the connector CN4 is The connector CN5 is a connector for supplying electric power to the frame serial relay board, and the connector CN5 is a connector for supplying electric power to the effect control board 80.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (such as CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch 921 that is input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (including steps S10 to S15, S44, and S45).

  If the clear switch 921 is not in the on state, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in step S41 and step S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply stop (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of step S11 and step S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout An initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to a control state such as a stop flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the initialization control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the variable display device 9 performs screen display for informing that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (step S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the prohibition period timer (step S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of an abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the prohibition period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the variable display device 9.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R. In the random number circuit setting process, the CPU 56 also executes a random number circuit confirmation process for confirming the state of the random number circuit 503. In the random number circuit confirmation process, the CPU 56 monitors the random number confirmation signal output from the random number circuit 503 for a predetermined time. The random number confirmation signal is in an on state when the clock signal generation circuit built in the random number circuit 503 outputs the internal clock signal normally, and otherwise (for example, when the level of the internal clock signal decreases) To be off). When the CPU 56 detects the OFF state of the random number confirmation signal continuously for a predetermined time, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormality has occurred in the random number circuit 503 and specifies that the random number circuit error of the main board 31 is to be notified. A process of transmitting the specified command to the sub board is executed. If the OFF state of the random number confirmation signal is not detected continuously for a predetermined time, the CPU 56 determines that the random number circuit 503 is operating normally, and proceeds to step S15 as it is.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S36 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a display control process for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S34 and S35.

  In addition, the CPU 56 detects that a game ball has won the big winning opening at a time other than the regular time, or has detected that a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 at a time other than the regular time. In such a case, a process for notifying abnormal winning is performed (step S23: abnormal winning notifying process).

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Decide a special symbol's off symbol (stop symbol) (for determining off symbol)
(2) Random 2: Determines the special symbol stop symbol when generating a big hit (for big hit symbol determination)
(3) Random 3: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5: Random 4 initial value is determined (for determining random 4 initial value)

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 44, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot symbol determination random number (2) and the random number for determination per regular symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may make it use random numbers other than the random number of said (1)-(5). In this embodiment, the big hit determination random number is a random number generated by the hardware (random number circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 560. However, the big hit determination random number is generated by the game control microcomputer 560 as the big hit determination random number. Software random numbers generated based on a program may be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, the corresponding symbol is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S29). In this embodiment, in step S29, the game control microcomputer 560 adds MODE data or EXT data (addresses of transmission destination serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 619, 622, and 623 to the effect control command). Header data, mark bits, and end bits are added to the generated MODE data or EXT data) to perform transmission control. The effect control command is converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 78 and transmitted to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (Step S31). Specifically, the payout control is performed according to the winning detection based on any one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls. In the prize ball process, a process for determining whether or not a prize ball error has occurred is also performed. For example, when there is a discrepancy between the set value of the number of prize balls and the actual number of payouts, the CPU 56 determines that a prize ball error has occurred, and causes the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 to Control is performed to transmit a prize ball error notification designation command for designating notification of occurrence of a prize ball error.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes an error detection process based on the detection signal of the full switch, the ball break switch, and the door opening sensor 155 (step S32). Specifically, a full tank error notification designation command for designating notification to the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 that a full tank error has occurred in response to the detection signal of the full tank switch. Send. In addition, in response to a detection signal from the ball-out switch, a ball-out error notification designation command for designating notification to the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 that a ball-out error has occurred. Send. In response to the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155, a door opening error notification designation command for designating that the door opening error has occurred is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. To do.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S33: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, if the change speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a special signal on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S35). For example, when the start flag relating to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S36), and the process ends.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S35 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination determination table includes a normal big hit determination table (see FIG. 46 (A)) used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probable change state) and a probable change big hit determination table (FIG. 46 (B)) used in a positive change state. See). The numerical values described in the left column of FIGS. 46A and 46B are jackpot determination values. When the value of the random R matches any one of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 56 determines that the jackpot is to be made. The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the jackpot determination random value. If the jackpot determination random value matches the jackpot determination value shown in FIG. Is determined to be a big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit).

  The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that shifts the gaming state after the jackpot game to a probability variation state in which there is a high probability of being determined to be a jackpot compared to the normal state. Usually, the big hit is a big hit that shifts the gaming state after the big hit game to a state that is not a probable change state. Note that the number of rounds in the case of a probable big hit and the normal big hit is larger than that in the case of a small hit and a sudden probable big hit, for example, 15 rounds.

  The small win is a hit in which the number of times of opening the big winning opening is allowed in the big hit gaming state. Note that when the small hit game ends, the gaming state does not shift to the probable change state. Suddenly probable jackpot is a jackpot where the number of times the big prize opening is allowed is 2 in the big hit gaming state, but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, and the gaming state after the big hit game is shifted to the probable state It ’s a big hit. That is, in this embodiment, the number of rounds is the same between the sudden probability big hit and the small hit.

  In the big hit game of sudden probability change big hit, the number of rounds is smaller than in the case of normal big hit and probability variable big hit, and the allowance opening time for each round (for example, 29 seconds in the case of normal big hit and probability variable big hit) On the other hand, 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the case of the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit, but only the number of rounds may be reduced, or only the allowance opening allowance time may be shortened.

  In the determination using the big hit determination random number (random R), only whether or not the big hit is determined is determined, and the big hit is determined according to the type of the symbol determined using the big hit symbol determination random number (random 2). May be determined (for example, whether it is a probability big hit or a normal big hit).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern used in this embodiment. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). In FIG. 47, “EXT” indicates EXT data at the second byte in the effect control command having a two-byte structure. The “variation time” indicates the variation time of special symbols (variation display period of identification information).

  “Normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern without a reach mode. “Normal fluctuation / shortening” is a fluctuation pattern without a reach mode and a fluctuation time shorter than “normal fluctuation”. “Normal reach” is a variation pattern that is accompanied by a reach mode but whose display result (stop symbol) does not become a big hit symbol. “Reach A” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “normal reach”. When the reach mode is different, a change mode (speed, rotation direction, etc.), a character image, or the like in a different mode appears in the variable display device 9 during the reach change time (a period during which the reach effect is performed), The background design is different. For example, in “normal reach”, a reach mode is realized by only one type of change mode, whereas in “reach A”, a reach mode including a plurality of change modes having different speeds and directions of change is realized. Further, “reach A / shortening” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach A”, but reach variation time is shorter than “reach A”. “Reach A / Extension” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “Reach A”, but the reach variation time is longer than “Reach A”.

  “Reach B” is a fluctuation pattern having a reach mode different from “Normal reach” and “Reach A”. Further, “reach B / shortening” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach B”, but the reach variation time is shorter than “reach B”. “Reach B / extension” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach B”, but reach variation time is longer than “reach B”. “Reach C” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, and “reach B”. “Reach C / shortening” is a variation pattern having a reach manner similar to “reach C”, but reach variation time is shorter than “reach C”.

  “Super reach A” is a variation pattern having a reach mode different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, “reach B”, and “reach C”. is there. “Super reach B” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, “reach B”, “reach C” and “super reach A”. This is a variation pattern. “Reach A / Accuracy” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from “Normal reach”, “Reach A”, “Reach B”, “Reach C”, “Super reach A” and “Super reach B”. It should be noted that the reach form of “reach A / accuracy” is a reach form similar to “reach A”.

  “Reach D” is different from “normal reach”, “reach A”, “reach B”, “reach C”, “super reach A”, “super reach B” and “reach A / accuracy”. And a variation pattern having a reach mode by character selection reach as described above. “Reach E” means “Normal Reach”, “Reach A”, “Reach B”, “Reach C”, “Super Reach A”, “Super Reach B”, “Reach A / Random” and “Reach D”. Is a variation pattern having a reach manner that is different from that of the reach reach as described above and not a super reach among the chance reach as described above. “Reach F” means “Normal Reach”, “Reach A”, “Reach B”, “Reach C”, “Super Reach A”, “Super Reach B”, “Reach A / Outstanding”, “Reach D”. And “reach E” is a variation pattern having a reach form different from that described above, and is a change pattern having a reach form when becoming a super reach among the chance reach as described above.

  In this embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the game control microcomputer 560 is “reach A / shortening”, “reach A”, “reach B / shortening”, “reach B”, “reach C / shortening”. "Reach C", "Super Reach A", "Super Reach B", "Reach D" or "Reach E". In the case of a probable big hit, the microcomputer 560 for game control includes “reach A / extension”, “reach B / extension”, “reach C / shortening”, “reach C”, “super reach A”, “ Select "Super Reach B" or "Reach E". In case of sudden big odds, select “Reach A / Random”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the fluctuation pattern selected only in the case of the normal big hit, the fluctuation pattern selected only in the case of the probability big hit, and the normal big hit and the probability variable big hit can be selected. There are fluctuation patterns.

  In the short-time state, the fluctuation patterns of “normal fluctuation / shortening”, “reach A / shortening”, “reach B / shortening”, and “reach C / shortening” are selected. In the non-time-short state, other variation patterns are selected. However, the variation pattern of “reach A / accuracy” is used in both the short-time state and the non-short-time state.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit occurs and the big hit game ends, the gaming state becomes a short-time state until the execution of the variation (variation display) of 100 special symbols is completed. In addition, when it is decided to change to the probable state when starting the variable display of the special symbol when the big hit game is started when the variable display is finished, the game state is changed to the probable state when the big hit game is ended. To be migrated. If the gaming state at that time is a probability variation state, the probability variation state is continued.

  After the transition to the probability changing state, the state of the probability changing state is short and the time is shortened until the execution of the fluctuation of the special symbol 100 (change display) is completed. In addition, in the non-probability change state after the big hit game is over, the game state is changed to the normal state (the game state that is not the probability change state and not the short-time state) when the execution of 100 special symbol changes (change display) is completed. Transition.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. In this embodiment, the effect control command is converted from parallel data to serial data by the serial output circuit 78 and transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the format of the effect control command transmitted as the serial data method. As shown in FIG. 48, when transmitting the effect control command, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first adds header data and mark bits to MODE data (MODE data to which an address is added), Transmission control is performed by adding an end bit. Then, the serial output circuit 78 converts the MODE data to which the header data, the address, the mark bit, and the end bit are added into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77. Next, the game control microcomputer 560 performs transmission control by adding header data, mark bits, and end bits to EXT data (EXT data with an address added). Then, the serial output circuit 78 converts the EXT data to which the header data, the address, the mark bit, and the end bit are added into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 49, commands 8001 (H) to 8012 (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the variable display device 9 in response to the variation display of special symbols. Pattern command). The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any one of the commands 8001 (H) to 8012 (H), the variable display device 9 controls the variable display device 9 to start the variable display of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, since the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the decoration symbol are synchronized (the variation display start time and the variation display end time are the same), the variation pattern (variation time) of the decoration symbol Determining also means determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H). Therefore, the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result specifying commands.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the decorative symbol variation display (variation) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the decorative symbol variation display (variation) and derives and displays the display result. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration. The command 9F55 (H) is an effect control command (random number circuit error) for designating notification of a random number circuit error of the main board 31 when the occurrence of an abnormality in the random number circuit 503 is detected in the random number circuit check process in the main process. Specified command).

  The commands A001 to A004 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation commands include jackpot start 1 designation to jackpot start designation 4 designation commands depending on the type of jackpot. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there.

  Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (abnormal winning notification designation command) for instructing notification of abnormal winning.

  The command FF02 (H) notifies that a full tank error has occurred when the lower pan (the surplus ball receiving tray 4) is full (that is, when the full tank switch is turned on). This is an effect control command to be designated (full error notification designation command). The command FF01 (H) is an effect control command for designating cancellation of the full-tan error notification when the full-plate state of the lower pan is released (that is, when the full-tan switch is turned off). (Full tank error release specification command).

  The command FF04 (H) designates that when the game frame 11 is in an open state (that is, when a detection signal from the door open sensor 155 is detected), notification that a door open error has occurred is notified. This is a command (door opening error notification designation command). The command FF03 (H) is an effect control command (door opening error release specifying command) that specifies that the notification of the door opening error is released when the open state of the game frame 11 is released.

  Command FF06 (H) is an effect control command (out of ball) that specifies that a ball out error has occurred when the ball is out of state (that is, when the ball out switch is turned on). Error notification designation command). The command FF05 (H) is an effect control command (ball-out error cancel designation command) that designates cancellation of the ball-out error notification when the ball-out state is released.

  The command FF08 (H) is an effect control command (prize ball error notification designation command) for designating notification that a prize ball error has occurred when a prize ball error has occurred. The command FF07 (H) is an effect control command (prize ball error cancel designation command) that designates canceling the notification of the prize ball error when the prize ball error is canceled.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the variable display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 49, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the transmission timing of the effect control command. As shown in FIG. 50, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a change pattern command and a display result specifying command at the start of change. When the variable display time has elapsed, a symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted.

  Before transmitting the variation pattern command, a background designation command for designating a background image in the variable display device 9 according to the gaming state (for example, normal state / short time state / probability variation state) may be transmitted. Further, an effect control command indicating the number of reserved memories may be transmitted following the display result specifying command.

  51 and 52 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S27) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, if the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the start winning port 13 is turned on, that is, a start winning is generated. If so, start port switch passage processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of special symbols can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of reserved memories (the number of start winning memories). The reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to step S301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the special symbol display 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the big hit flag is set and the small hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the variable display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when it receives the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Further, a process for setting a flag (for example, a probability variation flag) indicating a gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed each time the big winning opening is opened in the small hits, but if the big winning opening is opened for the first time, the pre-opening for small hits starts the small hit game. It is also a process to do.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Control for transmitting the presentation control command of the opening of the big winning opening (corresponding to the big winning round display) during the small hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for the production control and confirmation of the closing condition of the big winning opening are confirmed. Perform processing. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the opening times (for example, two times) are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)). Update.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the reserved storage number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step S211). If the number of reserved memories is 4, the process is terminated.

  If the number of reserved memories is not 4, the value of the reserved memory number counter indicating the number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (step S212). Further, the CPU 56 extracts software random numbers (counter value for generating a big hit symbol determination random number, etc.) and random R (big hit determination random number), and uses them as an extracted random number value of the reserved memory number counter. A process of storing in the storage area in the storage buffer corresponding to the value is executed (step S213). In step S213, the CPU 56 extracts random values 1 to 3 (see FIG. 45) as software random numbers, and extracts the random R by reading the count value of the random number circuit. In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is secured. Further, a counter for generating a jackpot symbol determination random number and the like and a reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks the value of the number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of reserved memories is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S52). Then, the value of the reserved memory number is reduced by 1 (the count value of the reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S53). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n−1. To store. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories is extracted always matches the order of the number of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3 and 4. Yes.

  Then, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes a jackpot determination module (step S62). The big hit judgment module compares the big hit judgment value (see Fig. 46) determined in advance with the big hit judgment random number, and if they match, the big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit) or small hit This is a program for executing the process to be determined.

  Note that when the gaming state is in the probability changing state, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot determination value in the table in which the jackpot determination value as shown in FIG. 46B is set, and the gaming state is in the normal state (non-probability changing state). Is, the jackpot determination value in the table in which the jackpot determination value as shown in FIG. 46 (A) is set is used. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S63), the process proceeds to step S81. Note that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol display 8 a big hit symbol. It is also a thing.

  If it is decided not to win, the CPU 56 reads out the design symbol random number from the random number buffer area (step S64), and determines the stop symbol based on the design symbol random number (step S65). In this case, an off symbol (for example, any of even symbols) is determined.

  Further, when the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state is set (step S66), the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (step S67). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0, a time reduction end flag is set in order to shift the gaming state to the non-time reduction state when the variable display ends (steps S68 and S69). Then, the process proceeds to step S90.

  In step S81, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the big hit symbol determination random number is read from the random number buffer area (step S82), and the big hit symbol (for example, one of the odd symbols) as the stop symbol is determined based on the big hit symbol determination random number (step S83). Here, the stop symbol is determined without distinguishing between the probable big hit and the normal big hit.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation jackpot flag if it is determined to be a probability variation jackpot (steps S84 and S85). If it is determined that the sudden probability change big hit is suddenly set, the sudden probability change big hit flag is set (steps S86 and S87). If it is determined to be a small hit, a small hit flag is set (steps S88 and S89). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S90). When the probability variation big hit flag or the sudden probability variation big hit flag is set, the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state when the big hit game is finished.

  In this embodiment, whether or not to make a big hit and the type of jackpot are determined based on the big hit determination random number (see FIG. 46), but the big hit is determined based on the big hit determination random number. When a predetermined jackpot symbol (predetermined probability variation jackpot symbol or sudden probability variation jackpot symbol) is determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot You may make it control to a probability change state.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number buffer area (step S100). Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination random number (step S101).

  Here, when the gaming state is a non-time saving state and it is determined to be out of play, “normal variation” or “normal reach” is selected (see FIG. 47). If the gaming state is a non-time-saving state and it is determined to be a big hit, “reach A”, “reach A / extension”, “reach B”, “reach B / extension”, “reach C” ”,“ Super Reach A ”,“ Super Reach B ”or“ Reach A · Accuracy ”(see FIG. 47). When it is determined to be a promising big hit out of the big hits, “reach A / extension”, “reach B / extension”, “reach C”, “super reach A” or “super reach B” is selected. In addition, when it is determined that the sudden probability change is a big hit, “reach A / accuracy” is selected. In addition, when it is determined to be a small hit, “reach A / small hit” is selected. If it is determined that the big hit is a normal big hit, “reach A”, “reach B”, “reach C” or “super reach A” is selected.

  When the game state is the short time state and it is determined to be out of play, “normal variation / shortening” is selected (see FIG. 47). If the gaming state is a short-time state and it has been decided to win a big hit, select “reach A / shortening”, “reach B / shortening”, “reach C / shortening” or “reach A / probability” Select (see FIG. 47). When it is determined to be a promising big hit out of the big hits, “reach C / shortening” is selected. When it is decided to suddenly change the probability big hit, select “reach A / accuracy”. In addition, when it is determined to be a small hit, “reach A / small hit” is selected. When it is determined that the big hit is the normal big hit, “reach A / shortening”, “reach B / shortening” or “reach C / shortening” is selected.

  In order to facilitate the selection as described above, a variation pattern table is used according to the game state (whether or not it is a short-time state) and the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit (rejected and big hit types, respectively) . The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 54, but is prepared according to the gaming state and the determination result as to whether or not to win. In each variation pattern table, data indicating a variation pattern that can be selected and a numerical value corresponding to the data are set. Then, the CPU 56 selects a variation pattern table according to the gaming state and the determination result as to whether or not to win, and corresponds to a numerical value that matches the value of the variation pattern determination random number in the selected variation pattern table. Select a variation pattern. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 selects the variation pattern depending on whether or not the jackpot has already been determined and whether or not the probability variation jackpot is set.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command (see FIG. 47) corresponding to the variation pattern selected in step S101 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is used as a pointer. set. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S29).

  Moreover, the variation of the special symbol is started (step S104). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S34 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time (see FIG. 47) corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302). In the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs any one of the display control 1 designation to the display result 5 designation according to the determined type of jackpot (including the jackpot) (see FIG. 31). Control to send. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag (which is also set when the small hit is determined) is set (step S110). If not set, control is performed to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S111). When the big hit flag is set, when the probability variation big hit flag is set, control for transmitting the display result 4 designation command is performed (steps S112 and S113). When the sudden probability big hit flag is set, control for transmitting a display result 5 designation command is performed (steps S114 and S115). When the small hit flag is set, control for transmitting a display result 3 designation command is performed (steps S116 and S117). When none of the probability variation big hit flag, sudden probability variation big hit flag, and small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (step S118). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer, and when the variable time timer times out, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S34 to end the variation of the special symbol, and performs control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol on the special symbol display 8. (Step S131). Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for production control is performed (step S132). When the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S146 (step S133).

  If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the short time flag (step S134) and controls to send a big hit start designation command if set (step S135). Specifically, when the probability variation big hit flag is set, a big hit start 3 designation command is transmitted, and when the probability variation big hit flag is suddenly set, a big hit start 4 designation command is transmitted. If it is set, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted, otherwise a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted.

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the big hit in the variable display device 9, for example) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S136). If the small hit flag is set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S308) (steps S137 and S138). If the small hit flag is not set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S305) (step S139). The case where the small hit flag is not set is a case where the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit or the sudden probability variation big hit is determined.

  In step S146, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction end flag is set. If the time saving end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S149. If the time reduction end flag is set, the time reduction end flag is reset (step S147), and the time reduction flag indicating that the gaming state is the time reduction state is reset (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S149).

  The time reduction end flag is set in step S69 in the special symbol normal process. In addition, the gaming state shifts to a non-time saving state by resetting the time saving flag. At this stage, if the gaming state is a probability variation state, the gaming state becomes a probability variation state of a non-short-time state. On the other hand, if it is in the non-probable change state, it shifts to a normal state (a state that is not in the probabilistic change state and is not in the time-short state).

  In the big winning opening opening pre-processing, when the big hit display time timer is set, the CPU 56 controls to open the big winning opening when the big hit display time timer times out, and sets the big winning opening opening time timer. Set a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 29 seconds for normal big hits and probable big hits, and 0.5 seconds for sudden big odds), and the special symbol process flag value is processed while the big prize opening is open The value is updated to a value corresponding to (Step S306). The case where the big hit display time timer is set is the case before the start of the first round. When the interval timer (timer for determining the interval time between rounds) is set, when the interval timer times out, control is performed to open the big prize opening and the opening time ( For example, a value corresponding to 29 seconds is set for a normal big hit and a probable big hit, and a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for a sudden probable big hit, and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a process for opening a big winning opening (step S306). ) To a value corresponding to.

  In the process during opening of the big prize opening, the CPU 56 does not finish the final round when the big prize opening time timer times out or the number of winning balls to the big prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). In this case, control for closing the special winning opening is performed, a value corresponding to the interval time is set in the interval timer, and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S305). Update. When the final round is completed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S307).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S150). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S154. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S151), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S152). Here, if the probability variation jackpot flag or the sudden probability variation bonus flag is set, a jackpot end 2 designation command is transmitted, and if the probability variation jackpot flag or the sudden probability variation bonus flag is not set, the jackpot end 1 designation is specified. Send a command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the variable display device 9 (the jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S153), and the processing is ended. The jackpot end display timer has a display time that is longer than the count switch detection time, which is the time that the count switch 23 can detect a game ball that has won a big winning opening immediately before the jackpot ends even after the jackpot ends. A long time is set. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation where an abnormal winning notification is executed at an unnatural timing when an abnormal winning is detected immediately after the end of the big hit.

  In step S154, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S155). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the time reduction flag is set to shift the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S156), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter (step S157).

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the probability variation big hit flag or the sudden probability variation big flag is set (step S158). If the probability variation jackpot flag or sudden probability variation winning flag is set, the set flag (probability variation jackpot flag or sudden probability variation winning flag) is reset (step S159), the probability variation flag is set and the gaming state is set. The state is changed to a certain change state (step S161). If the gaming state at that time is a probability variation state, the probability variation flag has already been set. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S162).

  In the pre-opening process for small hits in step S308, the same process as the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S305) is performed. However, instead of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large winning opening opening process, the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process. Further, in the small hit opening process in step S309, the same process as the big prize opening opening process (step S306) is performed. However, when the big winning opening is opened for the first time in small hits (that is, the first of the two big winning openings opened during the small hit), the value of the special symbol process flag is processed before the small hit opening process. If the value is updated to a value corresponding to (Step S308) and is opened for the second time (that is, the second of the two big prize opening during the small hit), the value of the special symbol process flag Is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end process (step S310).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S310) in the special symbol process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step S170). If the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S174. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are reset (steps S171A and S171B), and control for transmitting the big hit end 1 designation command is performed (step S172). Then, the small hit end display timer sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the variable display device 9 (small hit end display time) in the small hit end display timer ( Step S173), the process is terminated. The small hit end display timer has a count switch detection as a display time, which is a time during which the count switch 23 can detect a game ball that has won a big winning opening just before the small hit end even after the end of the small hit. A time longer than the time is set. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an abnormal winning notification is executed at an unnatural timing when an abnormal winning is detected immediately after the end of the small hit.

  In step S174, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S175). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S176).

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S28) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, when the game control microcomputer 560 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S111), the game switch microcomputer 560 performs the gate switch passage process (step S112). Execute. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 executes any one of the processes shown in steps S100 to S103 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Gate switch passage processing (step S112): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the count value of the gate passage memory counter (the number of gate passage memories) has reached the maximum value ("4" in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (ordinary symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passing gates. .

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S100): The game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where normal symbol variation can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100) The normal symbol display 10 does not display the variation of the normal symbol, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not in the opening / closing operation of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10). Confirms the value of the gate passing memory number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S101).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step S101): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10, The normal symbol stop symbol display time is set in the symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S102).

  Normal symbol stop processing (step S102): The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol. To do. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory operating time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Further, it is confirmed whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state, and if it is a high base state, an opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) in the high base state is selected, If in the low base state, the release pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) in the low base state is selected, and the selected release pattern is set. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S103).

  Ordinary electric accessory actuating process (step S103): The game control microcomputer 560 wins a game ball to the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) on the condition that the normal symbol process timer has not timed out. The ordinary electric accessory winning count process for counting the number (the number of winnings to the second start winning opening 14) is executed, and the ordinary electric accessory is released with the set opening pattern (of the variable winning ball apparatus 15). (Open / close operation is executed) Normal electric accessory release pattern processing is executed. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S100).

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal process (step S100). In the normal symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step S121). If the gate passing memory number is 0 (Y in step S121), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step S121), the game control microcomputer 560 reads out the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S122). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the gate passing memory number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S123). That is, the random number value for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n−1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the order of the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the normal symbol per-determination random number from the random number storage buffer (step S124), and determines whether to win or not based on the read random number value (step S125). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for normal symbol determination matches the hit determination value, and if there is a matching hit determination value, it is determined to be a hit. For example, when the hour / short flag is set, that is, when the base state is high (short time state, short state when probability change), the hit determination value is any one of 1 to 10, and when the low base state, the hit determination value is 3 or 7 and so on. If the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated in a numerical range of 0 to 10, the winning probability in the high base state is 10/11, and the winning probability in the low base state is 2/11. As described above, the hit is made with a high probability in the high base state, and the win is made only with a low probability in the low base state.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal symbol change time in the normal symbol process timer (step S126), and starts the normal symbol change in the normal symbol display 10 (step S127). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol at the time of the low base is 30.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol at the time of the high base is 1.0 seconds. . Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S101) (step S128).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing (step S101). In the normal symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S131). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S131), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S135).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (Y in step S131), the game control microcomputer 560 stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10. (Step S132). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer (step S133). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S102) (step S134).

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop process (step S102). In the normal symbol stop process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S141). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S141), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S142).

  When the normal symbol process timer expires, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S141), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol. (Whether or not it is determined to be a win in step S125) is confirmed (step S143). Note that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is determined by, for example, setting the normal symbol per symbol determination flag when it is determined to be a winning symbol in step S125, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can do.

  When the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step S143), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the normal electric accessory operating time in the normal symbol process timer (step S144). The ordinary electric accessory operating time is the maximum time during which the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) can operate. The normal electric accessory operating time is set to be longer in the high base state than in the low base state.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the game state is a high base state or a low base state (step S145). Whether the base state is the high base state or the low base state can be confirmed by checking whether or not the time reduction flag is set. When the time reduction flag is set, it can be determined that the high base state is set, and when the time reduction flag is not set, it can be determined that the low base state is set. In the high base state, a high base state flag indicating the high base state is set, and whether the base state is the high base state or the low base state is determined depending on whether or not the flag is set. You may do it.

  When in the high base state (Y in step S145), the game control microcomputer 560 selects the release pattern set in the high base time table shown in FIG. S146). On the other hand, when it is in the low base state (N in step S145), the game control microcomputer 560 selects the release pattern set in the low base time table shown in FIG. (Step S147). In the example shown in FIG. 65, in the low base table, data of an opening pattern with an opening time of 0.5 seconds and an opening frequency of 1 is set. Also, in the high base time table, data of an opening pattern with an opening time of 2.5 seconds and an opening frequency of 2 is set.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the release pattern selected in step S146 or S147 in the release pattern buffer (step S148). When the opening pattern is set in the opening pattern buffer, the opening pattern time (in this case, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set) is added to the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern timer (the timer for measuring the opening time and closing time of the ordinary electric accessory). A process of setting a closing time until the first opening is performed is also performed. Thereafter, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step S103) (step S149).

  In step S143, when it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but an off symbol (N in step S143), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the normal symbol normal flag. The value (specifically “0”) indicating the process (step S100) is updated (step S150).

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory actuating process (step S103). In the ordinary electric actor operation process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has expired (step S161). If the normal symbol process timer has not expired (N in step S161), the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S162).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 loads the switch-on buffer into the register (step S163). The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when switch-on is detected, and 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch when the switch-off is detected.

  The game control microcomputer 560 checks whether 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (corresponding bit of the second start port switch 14a) (step S164). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the second start opening switch 14a is turned on (whether or not a game ball has won the second start winning opening 14). If 1 is not set in the second start port switch input bit (N in step S164), the process proceeds to step S168. If 1 is set in the second start port switch input bit (Y in step S164), the second start port switch 14a is turned on. The number of the number of game balls won in the winning ball apparatus 15) is incremented by 1 (step S165). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is less than 8 (step S166). If the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is not less than 8 (N in step S166), that is, if it is 8 or more, the game control microcomputer 560 clears (sets to 0) the value of the normal symbol process timer. (Step S167). With this process, the ordinary electric accessory actuating process is completed (see Y in step S161, S172). Thus, in this embodiment, when eight or more game balls win the variable winning ball device 15 within the normal electric accessory operating time, the normal electric accessory operating process is terminated. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 clears the normal symbol process timer when eight or more game balls have won the variable winning ball device 15 within the normal electric accessory operating time (see step S167), and the same timer. In the interruption process, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed by setting the solenoid 16 in a non-excited state (see step S171), and the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S100) ( Specifically, it may be updated to “0” (see step S172).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 decrements the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer by -1 (step S168). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer is 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer has expired (step S169). If not timed out (N in step S169), the process is terminated as it is. If time-out has occurred (Y in step S169), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the release pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer (step S170). Note that the game control microcomputer 560 sets the release pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer based on the release pattern (see step S148) set in the release pattern buffer in the normal symbol stop process.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 560 drives the solenoid 16 to open or close the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) (step S171). In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 opens the variable winning ball apparatus 15 by exciting the solenoid 16. Alternatively, the game control microcomputer 560 closes the variable winning ball apparatus 15 by putting the solenoid 16 in a non-excited state.

  Specifically, when the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer expires when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the release time is set as the release pattern time in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer, and the output port buffer ( The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened by inverting the solenoid output bit of the ordinary electric accessory of the solenoid buffer. When the normal electric accessory release pattern timer expires when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, a closing time is set as an open pattern time in the normal electric accessory release pattern timer, and the normal output port buffer (solenoid buffer) The variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed by reversing the electric accessory solenoid output bit.

  By the processes in steps S168 to S171 described above, an open pattern in the low base state and an open pattern in the high base state are realized. When the gaming state is in the low base state, the opening time is 0.5 seconds and the number of times of opening is one, so that, for example, 1.0 seconds from the start of the normal electric accessory activation process When the closing time elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 0.5 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed. Further, when the gaming state is the high base state, the release time is 2.5 seconds and the number of times of opening is 2, so that, for example, 2.5 after the normal electric accessory actuating process is started. When the second closing time elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses thereafter, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed. When the closing time of 5 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and opened, and when the opening time of 2.5 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and closed.

  In step S161, when the normal symbol process timer expires (Y in step S161), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the value indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S100) (specifically, step S100). Is updated to “0”) (step S172).

  Next, payout control commands (payout control signals) transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a payout command signal and the like transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  The prize ball REQ signal is a signal that is in an output state (= ON state) when a prize ball number command is transmitted (that is, a trigger signal for a prize ball payout request). The 4-bit prize ball number signal is a signal (prize ball number command) output for designating the number of game balls (0 to 15) to be paid out. The prize ball count signal is a payout control signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 and is a signal corresponding to a detection signal of the payout number count switch 187.

  68 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of each control signal shown in FIG. In FIG. 68, a signal indicating an abnormality relating to payout (a payout error signal, a ball-out signal, a full tank signal) and a signal indicating another abnormality (door opening error) (door opening / closing signal) are also output from the payout control microcomputer 370. It is shown to be transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560. Also, a prize ball count signal indicating a state of a detection signal of the number-of-payout count switch 301 at the time of prize ball payout is transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 68, the prize ball REQ signal and the prize ball number signal are output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67 and input to the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. . A signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 is output via the output circuit 373B and input via the input circuit 68.

  FIG. 69 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output the payout control signal. As shown in FIG. 69, the winning detection switch (the count switch 23, the winning port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, 30a, the first starting port switch 13a, and the second starting port switch 14a) has detected the winning of the game ball. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on the prize ball REQ signal and sets the output state of the prize ball number signal according to the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning. Specifically, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects that a game ball has won a winning area provided in the gaming machine based on a detection signal from the winning detection switch, the gaming control microcomputer 560 calculates a predetermined number of winning balls. It is added to the content of the total number of winning balls stored in the backup RAM. When the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer becomes a non-zero value, the winning ball REQ signal is turned on, and the output state of the winning ball number signal is set in accordance with the number of winning balls to be paid out according to winning. Put it in a state.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a, four prize balls are paid out, and any of the winning port switches 33a, 39a, 29a, 30a is paid. When a game ball is detected, 7 prize balls are paid out. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are paid out. Further, as described above, since the prize ball number signal is composed of 4 bits, among the prize ball number signals of 00 (H) to 0F (H) expressed in 8 bits, the lower 4 bits are The signal is transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37 by the award ball number signal. Hereinafter, it may be expressed as “00 (H) to 0F (H) prize ball number signal”, but in actuality, the prize ball number signal is represented by 8 bits. This corresponds to the lower 4 bits of 0F (H).

  Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball number signal is transmitted by unidirectional communication in which the signal is transmitted only from the main board 31 toward the payout control board 37, but by bidirectional communication, A prize ball number signal may be transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37. When performing two-way communication, for example, the payout control microcomputer transmits an ACK signal (response signal) to the game control microcomputer 560 in response to reception of the prize ball REQ signal, or receives a prize ball number signal. An ACK signal indicating that the game has been performed is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, the switch process (step S21) in the main process will be described. In this embodiment, when the ON state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is certainly turned on. Specifically, the switch process is activated every 2 ms. However, if it is detected that both the switch process activated at the present time and the switch process activated 2 ms before are turned on, the switch process is surely performed. Determined to be on.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing each 1-byte buffer formed in the RAM 55 used in the switching process. The port buffer before two times is a buffer in which the switch on / off determination result of the previous time (assumed to be 4 ms before) is stored. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the switch on / off determination result of the previous time (2 ms before) is stored. As described above, in the switch-on buffer, when a switch on is detected, 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch, and when a switch off is detected, 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch. It is a buffer. The previous data is a buffer area that is temporarily used when the switch process is executed. The previous-time port buffer, the previous port buffer, the switch-on buffer, and the previous data are formed in the RAM 55. Further, the bit arrangement of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer two times in advance corresponds to the bit arrangement (not shown) of the input port. That is, information corresponding to each of the switch detection signals assigned to bits 0 to 7 of the input port is set in bits 0 to 7 of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer the previous time.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a processing example of the switch processing in step S21 in the game control processing. In the switch process, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the content of the previous port buffer to the previous data (step S331). Further, the exclusive OR of the contents of the port buffer and the previous data is taken twice before (step S332). Then, the result of the exclusive OR operation is set as the previous data (step S333). At this stage, in the previous data, the bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. In addition, the contents of the previous port buffer are set in the port buffer two times before (step S334).

  Then, input port 0 data is input (step S335), and the input data is set in the previous port buffer (step S336). The processes in steps S334 and S336 correspond to a preparation process when the switch process is executed next time (after 2 ms).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 takes the logical product of the data input from the input port 0 and the previous data (step S337). At this stage, in the previous data, a bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. That is, among the detection signals of the seven switches, the bit corresponding to the detection signal changed from the state before 2 ms from the state before 4 ms (from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”). Is “1”. Therefore, when the logical product of the previous data and the data input from the input port 0 is taken in step S337, the bit that is “1” in the data input from the input port 0 and 2 ms before The bit whose state has changed from the state 4 ms before becomes “1”. That is, as a result of the logical product operation, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the current state is the on state and has been detected to have changed from the off state to the on state during the previous switch processing (2 ms before) is “ 1 ”. In other words, the bit corresponding to the detection signal that has changed from the off state to the on state and then detected the on state twice in succession is “1”. Note that “continuously twice” means “both the switch process executed at a certain time and the switch process executed 2 ms after the switch process”.

  The game control microcomputer 560 stores the result of the AND operation in the switch-on buffer (step S338). In the switch-on buffer, after changing from the off state to the on state, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the on state is detected twice consecutively is “1”. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can confirm that the detection signal of the switch corresponding to the bit which is “1” in the switch-on buffer is surely turned on. Note that “definitely” means that the ON state has been detected twice in succession, that is, it can be considered that the ON state has continued for 4 ms, so it is determined that the ON state of the detection signal is not due to noise or the like. It can be done.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S31. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize ball number addition process (step S341) and a prize ball control process (step S342).

  In the prize ball number adding process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 73 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “7”) is set at the start address of the winning ball number table, and the switch input bit determination for each switch of the winning opening from which the winning ball is to be paid out by winning from the next address. The value and the number of winning balls are sequentially set corresponding to each switch of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to a bit to which a detection signal of each switch at the input port is input.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number adding process in step S341. In the winning ball number adding process, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the start address of the winning ball number table as a pointer (step S351). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S352). Next, the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (step S353).

  Then, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S354), and the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the switch input bit determination value) is calculated (step S355). . Further, the value of the pointer is increased by 1 (step S356).

  If the calculation result in step S355 is not 0 (N in step S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the process proceeds to step S362A. If the calculation result in step S355 is 0 (Y in step S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not on, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S359), and if the number of processes is 0 The process ends, and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S354 (step S360).

  In step S362A, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the switch input bit determination value used in the process of step S355 is a count switch input bit determination value. That is, it is confirmed whether or not it is confirmed in step S361 that the count switch 23 is turned on (whether or not the switch to be inspected is the count switch 23).

  When the switch input bit determination value is the count switch input bit determination value (Y in step S362A), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more ( Step S362B). That the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more means that the processing after the pre-opening process of the big winning opening in step S304 is executed in the special symbol process. That is, it means that a big hit game or a small hit game is being played. Here, during the big hit game, it is a period from when the big hit display is started until the big hit end processing is ended. Further, during the small hit game, it is a period from the start of the small hit display until the end of the small hit end process. In other words, the value of the special symbol process flag being 5 or more indicates that there is a possibility that control for opening the big prize opening may be performed when the game control is normally executed. .

  When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (Y in step S362B), the game control microcomputer 560 uses the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of prize balls) as a prize ball. The added value is set (step S364), and the prize ball addition value is added to the contents of the 16-bit total prize ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S365). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S357 and S358). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 is a state where the big hit game and the small hit game are not executed, and the control for opening the big winning opening is not executed. When it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on in such a state, it means that an abnormal prize has occurred at the big prize opening or that the detection signal from the count switch 23 has a noise over a long period (over 4 ms). Means that you got on. Therefore, when it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on in a state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (N in step S362B), the prize ball addition value is added to the total prize ball number storage buffer. Do not execute control. That is, the prize ball payout based on the count switch 23 being turned on is not executed (the processes in steps S364 and S365 are skipped). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  When the switch input bit determination value is not the count switch input bit determination value (N in step S362A), the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the switch input bit determination value used in the process of step S355 is the second start port switch input. It is confirmed whether or not the bit determination value has been reached (step S363A). That is, it is confirmed in step S361 whether or not the second start port switch 14a has been turned on (whether or not the switch to be inspected is the second start port switch 14a).

  If the switch input bit determination value is the second start port switch input bit determination value (Y in step S363A), the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 or not. (Step S363B). That the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 means that the normal electric accessory actuating process of step S103 is being executed in the normal symbol process. That is, it means that the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) is being opened and closed.

  When the switch input bit determination value is not the second start port switch input bit determination value (N in Step S363A) and when the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 (Y in Step S363B), the game control The microcomputer 560 sets the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the prize ball number) to the prize ball addition value (step S364), and the prize ball addition value is 16 bits formed in the RAM 55. Is added to the contents of the total number of winning balls storage buffer (step S365). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S357 and S358). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 is a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is not operating and the control for opening the variable winning ball device 15 is not executed. In such a state, it is detected that the second start opening switch 14a is turned on. This means that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14 or a detection signal from the second start opening switch 14a is long. This means that noise has been applied for a period (over 4 ms). Therefore, when it is detected that the second start port switch 14a is turned on when the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S363B), the prize ball addition value is added to the total prize ball number storage buffer. Do not execute the control. That is, the prize ball payout based on the fact that the second start port switch 14a is turned on is not executed (steps S364 and S365 are skipped). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  In the above processing, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag, but actually opens the big winning opening. When it is detected that the count switch 23 is turned on when the count switch 23 is not turned on, the prize ball payout based on the count switch 23 being turned on may not be executed. For example, when the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening, the big prize opening release flag is set, and when the big prize opening is closed, the big prize opening release flag is controlled to be opened. The prize ball payout may not be executed based on the fact that the count switch 23 is turned on when the flag is not set. However, when configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. As a result, the determination process is simplified. Since the big winning opening is opened or closed over a plurality of rounds, it is determined whether or not the abnormal winning has occurred by judging whether or not the actual winning opening is controlled. To be complicated. It should be noted that control may be performed so that prize ball payout is not prohibited even if an abnormal winning at the special winning opening occurs.

  In addition, since there is a certain distance between the entrance of the big prize opening and the position where the count switch 23 is installed, it is determined whether or not the control for actually opening the big prize opening is performed, and whether or not an abnormal prize has occurred. In determining whether or not, it is necessary to consider a game ball that may have won a prize winning slot immediately before closing after performing a control for closing the prize winning opening. That is, it is necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow from the entrance of the big prize opening to the position where the count switch 23 is installed. In other words, it is necessary to start the determination as to whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred after a certain period of time has passed since the control for actually closing the special winning opening is performed. This also complicates the processing.

  However, as in this embodiment, when it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning to the big winning opening has occurred after the big winning end processing or the small winning end processing is completed, It is not necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow between the entrance of the mouth and the position where the count switch 23 is installed. This is because the game ball that has won the big winning opening immediately before closing has reached the installation position of the count switch 23 during the processing period of the big hit end processing or the small hit end processing after the big winning opening is closed. In this embodiment, during the processing period of the big hit end process or the small hit end process, that is, the period during which the big hit end display or the small hit end display is made on the variable display device 9, It is set longer than the time required to reach the installation position of the count switch 23.

  Also, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14 based on the value of the normal symbol process flag (see step S363B). When the ball device 15 is not opened (that is, when the variable winning ball device 15 repeats the opening / closing operation based on the opening pattern corresponding to the game state in the ordinary electric game machine operation processing shown in FIG. 66, the variable winning ball device 15 When it is detected that the second start port switch 14a is turned on when the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the prize ball payout may not be executed. However, when it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on the value of the normal symbol process flag as in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data. As a result, the determination process is simplified. For example, when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened or closed a plurality of times (twice in the embodiment) as in the high base state, the variable winning ball device 15 is actually opened. If it is determined whether or not the control is performed and it is determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred, the processing becomes complicated. However, the processing can be simplified by determining based on the normal symbol process flag. It should be noted that control may be performed so that prize ball payout is not prohibited even when an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs.

  In addition, since there is a certain distance between the entrance of the second start winning opening 14 and the installation position of the second start opening switch 14a, is it actually controlled to open the variable winning ball apparatus 15 or not? When determining whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred, a game ball that may have won the second start winning opening 14 immediately after closing after taking control of the variable winning ball device 15 is considered. There is a need to. That is, it is necessary to consider the time for the game ball to flow from the entrance of the second start winning opening 14 to the installation position of the second start opening switch 14a. Therefore, in this embodiment, the timing for determining the abnormal winning is delayed from the timing for closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15.

  Specifically, the time until the normal symbol process timer times out after the variable winning ball device 15 is closed last (that is, from when the variable winning ball device 15 is closed in step S171 to Y in step S161). Is set longer than the time until the game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 reaches the installation position of the second start opening 14a. That is, in step S170, a closing time (for example, 5 seconds) is set as an opening pattern time in the ordinary electric accessory release pattern timer, and until the ordinary symbol process timer times out after the ordinary electric accessory is finally closed in step S171. The normal electric accessory operating time is set so that the time becomes shorter (for example, 3 seconds) than the closing time (for example, 5 seconds) (step S144). The time until the normal symbol process timer times out after the ordinary electric accessory is closed for the last time (for example, 3 seconds), the game ball that won the second start winning opening 14 is set at the installation position of the second start opening 14a. It is sufficiently longer than the time to reach. By doing so, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection that an abnormal winning has occurred due to the winning of the game ball immediately before the variable winning ball device 15 is closed.

  As a method of delaying the timing for determining the abnormal winning ball from the timing for closing the variable winning ball device 15, in the above example, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed a predetermined time before the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. However, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, the abnormal winning determination is made, but at the same time as the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. Alternatively, the abnormal winning determination may be performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. Specifically, a predetermined time is set in the count timer when the value of the normal symbol process flag is changed from 3 to 0 (for example, immediately before or immediately after step S172 in FIG. 66), and every timer interruption (every 2 ms). ) Count down the count timer. When it is determined in the award ball number addition process that the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in Step S363B), it is determined whether or not the count timer is 0. When the count timer is 0, Step S364 is performed. The process of S365 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of step S359. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to delay the timing for determining an abnormal winning with respect to the timing for closing the variable winning ball device 15.

  It should be noted that, even in the determination of an abnormal winning to the big winning opening, the timing for determining the abnormal winning by the same method can be delayed from the timing for closing the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20). Specifically, when the value of the special symbol process flag is changed from 7 to 0 or from 10 to 0, a predetermined time is set in the count timer, and the count timer is counted down every timer interrupt (every 2 ms). Go. When it is determined in the prize ball number addition process that the value of the special symbol process flag is not 4 or more (N in step S362B), it is determined whether or not the count timer is 0. When the count timer is 0, step S364 is performed. , S365 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S359.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 in step S362B (N in step S362B) or the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 in step S363B (N in step S363B), prize ball payout is prohibited. The control to be performed may not be performed. As will be described later, when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an abnormal winning notification designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives an abnormal win. This is because it is considered that the generation of the prize ball based on the abnormal winning can be stopped to the minimum since the occurrence is notified.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control processing in step S342. In the prize ball control process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (step S371). If the value is 0, the process ends. If it is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value (“15” in this example) (step S372). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S373). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value, the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S374). Then, the contents of the prize ball number buffer are set in the output port for outputting the prize ball number signal (step S375). Further, “1” is set to the bit of the prize ball REQ signal of the output port for outputting the prize ball REQ signal (step S376).

  A prize ball REQ signal is output by the processing of step S376. That is, the prize ball REQ signal is turned on (see FIG. 69). In addition, a prize ball number signal is output by the process of step S375 (see FIG. 69). In this embodiment, the maximum prize ball command value is “15”. Therefore, a prize ball number signal designating the maximum number of payouts of “15” is transmitted to the payout control board 37. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 stores the number of wins for each payout number or for each payout slot, and transmits the award ball number signal to the payout control board 37 in descending order of the number of prize balls. Good. Conversely, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit the award ball number signal to the payout control board 37 in order from the smallest number of award balls.

  When the winning ball number signal is transmitted, the game control microcomputer 560 subtracts the contents of the winning ball number buffer (the winning ball payout number commanded to the payout control means) from the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer (step S377). ).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the ON period of the prize ball REQ signal. Specifically, an initial value is set in the wait counter (step S378). Then, the value of the wait counter is decremented by 1 until the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (steps S379 and S380). When the value of the wait counter reaches 0, the on period is terminated.

  That is, “0” is set to the bit of the prize ball REQ signal of the output port for outputting the prize ball REQ signal (step S381), and 00 (H) is set to the output port for outputting the prize ball number signal. (Step S382).

  When the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout board 37 receives the award ball number signal, it drives the payout device 97 so that the number of game balls specified by the award ball number signal is paid out.

  In this embodiment, as for the payout command signal, the prize ball number signal is transmitted by unidirectional communication in which the signal is transmitted only from the main board 31 toward the payout control board 37, but by bidirectional communication, A prize ball number signal may be transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37. In this case, for example, the payout control microcomputer 370 transmits an ACK signal (response signal) to the game control microcomputer 560 in response to reception of the prize ball REQ signal, or indicates that a prize ball number signal has been received. You may make it transmit an ACK signal to the microcomputer 560 for game control. Further, in this case, when the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs the ACK signal, it may keep the ACK signal on until the payout of the game ball is completed. Then, when the game ball payout is completed, the ACK signal may be turned off. By doing so, it is possible to check whether or not the game ball has been paid out on the game control microcomputer 560 side by checking whether or not the ACK signal has been turned off after being turned on. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit the award ball number signal again if there is a payout winning ball after the payout is completed. Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 may turn on the ACK signal for a moment when receiving the prize ball REQ signal or the prize ball number signal. In that case, if there is a prize ball that has not been paid out based on the fact that the ACK signal is turned on and turned off, the prize ball number signal may be transmitted again.

  As described above, when the award ball number signal is transmitted by unidirectional communication in which a signal is transmitted only in the direction from the main board 31 toward the payout control board 37, the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the award control microcomputer 370. When the ball number signal is received, the payout device 97 may be controlled so that the number of game balls specified by the prize ball number signal is paid out by INT interruption. With such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 560 can transmit the award ball number signal regardless of whether or not the game balls have been paid out. For this reason, the game control microcomputer 560 can eliminate the need to store the number of prize balls in the RAM or the like until one payout is completed, thereby preventing an increase in the storage capacity of the RAM or the like.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the abnormal winning notification process in step S23. In the abnormal winning notification process, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the abnormal notification prohibition flag is set (step S1581). The abnormality notification prohibition flag is set in a main process executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started (see step S44 in FIG. 43). If the abnormality notification prohibition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1585. When the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set, the value of the prohibition period timer set in step S45 is decremented by 1 (step S1582). When the value of the prohibition period timer becomes 0, that is, when the prohibition period timer times out, the abnormality notification prohibition flag is reset (steps S1583 and S1584).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is equal to or greater than 5 (pre-processing for opening a big prize opening) (step S1585). When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (Y in step S1585), the game is in a big hit game or a small hit game. If it is in such a state, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the big winning opening, so the process proceeds to the processing of step S1590 without performing the confirmation process of the abnormal winning to the big winning opening.

  The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 is a state where neither a big hit game nor a small hit game is played. In this state, if there is a game ball winning at the big winning opening, it can be determined that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, an abnormal winning confirmation process for the special winning opening shown below is performed.

  That is, if the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (N in step S1585), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S1586). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 takes the logical product of the contents of the loaded switch-on buffer and the count switch input bit determination value (01 (H), see FIG. 73) (step S1587). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 01 (H), that is, when the count switch 23 is on, the logical product operation result is 01 (H). When the count switch 23 is not turned on, the operation result of the logical product is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S1588), it is determined that an abnormal winning is made to the big winning opening, and control is performed to transmit an abnormal winning notification designating command to the effect control board 80 (step S1588). S1589). On the other hand, if the result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S1589), it is determined that no abnormal winning in the special winning opening has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S1590.

  By executing the processing from step S1585 to S1589 shown above, when the gaming state is not a specific gaming state (probability big hit state, normal big hit state, sudden probability variation big hit state or small hit state), the game ball wins a big prize. Based on the winning in the mouth, an abnormal winning is detected, and an abnormal winning notification is executed. In this embodiment, when the jackpot is closed, in the jackpot end process in the special symbol process, the jackpot end display timer is displayed as a display time just before the jackpot ends even after the jackpot ends. A time longer than the count switch detection time, which is a time during which the game ball that has won the big prize opening can be detected by the count switch 23, is set (see step S153). In addition, in the small hit end processing, the display time of the small hit end display timer is a time during which the count switch 23 can detect a game ball won in the big winning opening just before the small hit end even after the small hit end. A time longer than the count switch detection time is set. Therefore, even after the completion of a specific gaming state (including a small hit state), even if a winning of a game ball is detected until the predetermined grace period elapses after the large winning opening is closed, Is controlled so as not to be judged.

  In this embodiment, the specific gaming state has been described as including a small hit state. However, the specific gaming state does not include a small hit state, and the specific gaming state includes a probability variable big hit state, a normal big hit state, or a sudden probability variable big hit state. You may think that it is controlled by either. Also in this case, the processing from step S1585 to S1589 described above is executed, based on the fact that the game ball has won the big winning opening when the game state is neither the specific game state nor the small hit state. Thus, the abnormal winning is detected, and the abnormal winning notification is executed. In addition, even after the specific game state or the small hit state is finished, it is determined that an abnormal winning is detected even if a winning of a game ball is detected until a predetermined grace period elapses after the big winning opening is closed. Control not to.

  In step S1590, game control microcomputer 560 checks whether or not the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 (normal electric accessory operation processing) (step S1590). The state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is 3 is a state where the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) is opened and closed. If it is in such a state (Y in step S1590), there is a possibility that a game ball may win the second start winning opening 14, so that an abnormal winning confirmation to the second starting winning opening 14 is not performed. The winning notification process is terminated.

  A state where the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S1590) is a state where the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball device 15) is not opened or closed. If there is a game ball winning in the second start winning opening 14 in such a state, it can be determined that the winning is an abnormal winning. Therefore, the abnormal winning confirmation process to the second start winning opening 14 shown below is performed.

  That is, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is not 3 (N in step S1590), the game control microcomputer 560 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S1591). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 takes the logical product of the contents of the loaded switch-on buffer and the second start port switch input bit determination value (80 (H), see FIG. 73) (step S1592). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 80 (H), that is, when the second start port switch 14a is on, the logical product operation result is 80 (H). When the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 0 (00 (H)).

  If the logical product operation result is not 0 (N in step S1593), it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14, and control for transmitting an abnormal winning notification designation command to the effect control board 80 is performed. This is performed (step S1594). On the other hand, when the result of the logical product is 0 (Y in step S1593), it is determined that no abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning opening 14, and control for transmitting an abnormal winning notification designation command is performed. The abnormal winning notification process is terminated.

  When the count switch 23 is turned on in a state where neither a big hit game nor a small hit game is performed by the above processing, an abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted. The abnormal winning notification designation command is also transmitted when the second start opening switch 14a is turned on while the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not opened or closed.

  In addition, the process of steps S1581 to S1583 prohibits the start of abnormality notification when the production control microcomputer 100 is performing initialization notification. The production control microcomputer 100 continues to execute the initialization notification until the period corresponding to the prohibition period has elapsed since the start of the abnormality notification.

  Note that in the process of step S1585, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning to the big prize opening has occurred based on the value of the special symbol process flag. Similarly, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. Further, as described above, since the big hit end process or the small hit end process is executed for a predetermined time after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 has won a big winning opening immediately before closing. The game ball is prevented from being detected by the count switch 23 after the value of the special symbol process flag returns to 0, and an error is not notified even though it is a regular winning. .

  Further, in the process of step S1590, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not an abnormal winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred based on the value of the normal symbol process flag, so that step S363B Similar to the above process, since it can be determined whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred based on one data, the determination process can be simplified. In addition, as described above, as a method of delaying the timing for determining an abnormal prize from the timing for closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is set a predetermined time before the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0. Is closed, and when the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, an abnormal winning determination is made. Therefore, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is won at the second start winning opening 14 immediately before closing. The game ball is prevented from being detected by the second start switch 14a after the value of the normal symbol process flag returns to 0, and an error is reported even though it is a regular winning. There is nothing.

  As described above, when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is closed, the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, and after the predetermined time has elapsed since the value of the normal symbol process flag is switched from 3 to 0, You may make it perform determination. Also, in the determination of the abnormal winning to the big winning opening, the timing for determining the abnormal winning by the same method may be delayed from the timing for closing the big winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20).

  Further, in this embodiment, a common abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted when an abnormal winning at the big winning opening occurs and when an abnormal winning at the second start winning opening 14 occurs (steps S1589, S1594). However, a different abnormal prize notification designation command may be transmitted. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 turns on or blinks the LEDs 82a, 82b, 82e, and 82f on the side of the upper plate lamp in different production modes according to the received abnormal prize notification designation command (for example, with different lighting patterns). A) An abnormal winning notification may be executed.

  Further, after the abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted in step S1589 or step S1594, for example, the process may be stopped by controlling to shift to an infinite loop. In addition, when performing control to shift to an infinite loop, control may be performed so that normal processing is resumed after exiting the infinite loop after the infinite loop is repeatedly executed for a predetermined period.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). .

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, an operation detection process for detecting each operation of the pressing operation unit 811 and the rotation operation unit 812 in the operation unit 81 is executed (operation detection process: step S704a). Then, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the variable display device 9 is executed. In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol) is executed (step S706). Moreover, the notification control process process which performs notification using an effect device such as the variable display device 9 is executed (step S707). Furthermore, the serial input / output process which outputs the data set by the command analysis process, the effect control process process, and the notification control process process to the serial output circuit 353, and reads the data received from the input ICs 620 and 621 from the serial input circuit 354. Is executed (step S708). And the operation part failure determination process which detects failure of the press operation part 811 in the operation part 81 and the rotation operation part 812 is performed (step S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  For example, when the serial input circuit 102 receives serial data corresponding to the number of stages (bits) of its own circuit, the serial input circuit 102 outputs a reception completion signal to the effect control CPU 101. The reception completion signal is input to the interrupt terminal of the CPU 101 for effect control, for example. The effect control CPU 101 inputs data from the serial input circuit 102 via the input port 103 in an interrupt process started based on the reception completion signal being input to the interrupt terminal. Then, the input data is stored in the reception command buffer indicated by the command reception number counter in the command reception buffer, and the value of the command reception number counter is incremented by one. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 49) is the effect control command stored in the command reception buffer.

  79 to 81 are flowcharts showing specific examples of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 stores the display result specifying command in a display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618). . Then, a display result specifying command reception flag is set (step S619).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is one of the jackpot start 1-4 designation commands (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets the jackpot start 1-4 designation command reception flag (step S624).

  If the received presentation control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (step S631), the presentation control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the variable display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632A). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. Also, an initial notification flag is set (step S632B), and a RAM clear flag is set (step S632C).

  Further, if the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and an initial notification flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is an abnormal prize notification designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormal prize notification designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is a random number circuit error designation command (step S647), the effect control CPU 101 sets a random number circuit error flag (step S648).

  If the received production control command is a full tank error release designation command (step S649), the production control CPU 101 resets the full tank error notification flag set in step S652 described later and sets an error notification release flag ( Step S650).

  If the received production control command is a full tank error notification designation command (step S651), the production control CPU 101 sets a full tank error notification flag (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is a door opening error release designation command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 resets the door opening error notification flag set in step S656, which will be described later, and sets the error notification cancellation flag. (Step S654).

  If the received effect control command is a door opening error notification designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 sets a door opening error notification flag (step S656).

  If the received effect control command is a ball break error release designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 resets a ball break error notification flag set in step S660 described later and sets an error notification cancel flag. (Step S658).

  If the received effect control command is a ball-out error notification designation command (step S659), the effect control CPU 101 sets a ball-out error notification flag (step S660).

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball error release designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 resets a payout error notification flag set in step S664 described later and sets an error notification release flag. (Step S662).

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball error notification designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 sets a payout error notification flag (step S664).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S665). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the operation detection process (step S704a). In the operation detection process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process. First, based on detection signals input from the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d, any one of these press detectors is selected. It is determined whether or not the two pressure detectors are in a state of detecting an operation (step S671). Specifically, the respective detection data of the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM are read out, Based on the detection data, it is determined whether any one of the pressure detectors has detected an operation. When it is determined that any one of the pressure detectors has detected an operation, a direction selection operation detection flag for specifying the operation direction corresponding to the pressure detector that detected the operation is set (step S672). Then, the process proceeds to step S675 described later.

  The direction selection operation detection flag includes a front direction selection operation detection flag indicating that a front direction selection operation has been detected by operating the front direction portion of the pressing operation unit 811 and a rear direction portion of the pressing operation unit 811. A backward selection operation detection flag indicating that a backward selection operation has been detected, and a leftward selection operation detection indicating that a leftward selection operation has been detected by operating the leftward portion of the pressing operation unit 811. Including a flag and a right direction selection operation detection flag indicating that a right direction selection operation has been detected by operating the right direction portion of the pressing operation unit 811 and is selected corresponding to the pressure detector that has detected the operation. The For example, when the first pressure detector 81a detects an operation, the forward selection operation detection flag is set. When the second press detector 81b detects an operation, the left direction selection operation detection flag is set. When the third press detector 81c detects an operation, a backward selection operation detection flag is set. When the fourth press detector 81d detects an operation, a right direction selection operation detection flag is set.

  When it is determined in step S671 that any one of the pressure detectors has not detected the operation, the first pressure detector 81a, the second pressure detector 81b, the third pressure detector 81c, and the fourth pressure detector. Based on the detection signal input from the detector 81d, it is determined whether or not any of the plurality of press detectors has detected an operation (step S673). Specifically, the respective detection data of the first press detector 81a, the second press detector 81b, the third press detector 81c, and the fourth press detector 81d stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM are read out, Based on the detection data, it is determined whether or not any of the plurality of press detectors has detected an operation. When it is determined that any of the plurality of press detectors has detected the operation, it can be determined that the determination operation for pressing the entire pressing operation unit 811 downward has been performed, so the determination operation is detected. The determination operation detection flag indicating that this is set, and the process proceeds to step S675 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that any of the plurality of press detectors is not in a state in which an operation has been detected, none of the press detectors has been in a state in which an operation has been detected.

  In step S675, a rotation operation determination process for determining a rotation operation of rotation operation unit 812 is executed, and the process ends. The contents of the rotation operation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the rotation operation determination process (step S675). In the rotation operation determination process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process. First, the detection data of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM are read as current determination data (hereinafter referred to as current determination data) (step S711). . Further, the previous determination data used as the previous determination data (hereinafter referred to as the previous determination data) and stored in a predetermined previous determination data storage area of the RAM is read (step S712).

  Next, the read previous determination data and current determination data are compared to determine whether or not these data are different (step S713). Specifically, when the level of at least one of the detection signals of the first rotation detector 81e and the second rotation detector 81f is different between the previous determination data and the current determination data, these data are Judged to be different. When it is determined that the previous determination data is not different from the current determination data, the process proceeds to step S718 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the previous determination data and the current determination data are different, the rotation determination table shown in FIG. 32 is referred to, and the previous determination data and the current determination data are determined based on the previous determination data and the current determination data. From the combination of the determination data and the relationship between the rotation direction and the rotation amount, the rotation direction and the rotation amount of the rotation operation unit 812 are determined (determined). For example, the projection 8151 of the cover plate 815 has passed the apex of the convex portion of the dial base 816 by the right rotation operation as in the case where the previous determination data is “H, H” and the current determination data is “L, H”. When there is a change in the signal level, it is determined that the rotation direction is right rotation and the rotation amount is rotated by 15 degrees for the reason described above.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a rotation corresponding to a rotation amount for one click (a rotation amount of 15 degrees) has been detected (step S715). When it is determined that the rotation corresponding to the rotation amount for one click is not detected, that is, when the combination of the corresponding determination data is not set in the rotation determination table of FIG. 32 (for example, the previous determination data is “ When there is a change in the signal level when the protrusion 8151 of the cover plate 815 enters the bottom of each recess in the dial base 816, as in the case of “H, L” and the current determination data is “H, H”, For the reason described above, the rotation is performed but the rotation for one click is not detected, so the rotation direction and the rotation amount are not determined), and the process proceeds to step S718 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation corresponding to the rotation amount for one click has been detected, that is, when the combination of the corresponding determination data is set in the rotation determination table of FIG. 32, the determination is made at step S714. The rotation direction data and the rotation amount data are stored in a rotation detection data storage area provided in a predetermined area in the RAM (step S716). Then, a rotation operation detection flag indicating that the rotation operation has been detected is set, and the process proceeds to step S718.

  In step S718, by storing the current determination data as the previous determination data, the previous determination data is updated and stored, and the process ends.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S806 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801). Further, when the variation pattern command has not been received for a predetermined period, the display relating to the selection of the effect mode as shown in FIG. 33 is performed on the variable display device 9, and the process enabling the selection of the effect mode is performed.

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S802).

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Decoration symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the ornament symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Take control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the variable display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S805).

  Big hit game processing (step S805): Control during the big hit game is performed. For example, when receiving a command for opening a special prize opening or a designation command after opening a special prize opening, display control of the number of rounds in the variable display device 9 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S806).

  Big hit end processing (step S806): In the variable display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, an effect mode selection process for displaying an image as shown in FIG. 33 and making it possible to select an effect mode is executed (step S814), and the process ends. The effect mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813), and the process ends.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an effect mode selection process (step S814) in the variation pattern command reception waiting process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process. First, it is determined whether or not a production mode selection acceptance flag is set (step S721). The production mode selection acceptance flag is a flag indicating that the production mode selection operation is being accepted, and is set when the production mode selection acceptance image shown in FIG. 33B is displayed. It is reset when the effect mode determination image shown in (d) is displayed.

  When it is determined that the effect mode selection acceptance flag as described above is set, the process proceeds to step S728 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect mode selection acceptance flag is not set, it is determined whether any direction selection operation detection flag or determination operation detection flag is set (step S723). When it is determined that none of these detection flags is set, the process is terminated. As a result, when none of the direction selection operation and the determination operation is performed by the pressing operation unit 811, the effect mode selection acceptance image as shown in FIG. 33B is not displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined that any one of these detection flags is set, the set detection flag is reset (step S724), and the process proceeds to step S725.

  In step S725, display of the effect mode selection acceptance image as shown in FIG. 33B is started (step S725). Then, after the effect mode selection acceptance image is displayed for a predetermined period, as described above, images indicating the three effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C that can be selected are displayed as shown in (c). Further, by rotating the operation unit center lamp 82A in blue, a character string such as “Turn it!” On the pressing operation unit 811 is lit (may be blinked) to rotate the rotation operation unit 812. A serial setting process is executed to perform a rotation operation guidance light emission operation for guiding (step S726). Then, the production mode selection acceptance flag is set, and the process ends. As a result, in the next effect mode selection process, the process proceeds from step S721 to step S728. As described above, when any one of the direction selection operation and the determination operation is performed by the pressing operation unit 811, an effect mode selection acceptance image as shown in FIG. 33B is displayed, and the effect mode is changed. It becomes possible to select. Not only the operation of the pressing operation unit 811 but also when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is performed, an effect mode selection acceptance image as shown in FIG. 33B is displayed, and the effect mode is selected. It may be possible to do this.

  If it is determined that the effect mode acceptance flag is set and the process proceeds from step S721 to step S728, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation detection flag described above is set (step S728). When it is determined that the rotation operation detection flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S732 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation operation detection flag is set, an effect is selected according to the rotation operation (step S729). For example, such a rotation operation is performed in response to the display of images showing three effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C that can be selected as shown in FIG. Specifically, in step S729, the effect mode to be selected is switched for each rotation amount for one click. For example, in the initial state, the production mode A is selected, and when the left rotation operation is performed, the rotation operation is performed in the order of the production mode A → the production mode B → the production mode C → the production mode A. To select the production mode. When a clockwise rotation operation is performed, the effect mode is selected in the order of effect mode A → effect mode C → effect mode B → effect mode A. Then, an effect mode selection image for specifying the effect mode selected in step S729 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 33C and 33D (step S730).

  In addition, the example which switches the production | presentation mode to select for every rotation amount for 1 click was shown here. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control for switching the effect mode to be selected may be performed for each rotation amount for a plurality of clicks in the same rotation direction. When there are three effect modes to be selected as shown in FIG. 33, for example, control for switching the effect mode to be selected may be performed every rotation amount (120 degrees) for eight clicks.

  Next, the rotation operation detection flag is reset (step S731), and the operation unit center lamp 82A emits red light so that a character string such as “push! ), A serial setting process is executed in order to perform a pressing operation guidance light emission operation for guiding the pressing operation portion 811 to be pressed (step S731A). Then, the process proceeds to step S732.

  In step S732, it is determined whether the determination operation detection flag described above is set. If it is determined that the determination operation detection flag is not set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination operation detection flag is set, the effect is determined according to the determination operation (step S733). For example, such a determination operation is performed in response to the display of images indicating the three effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C that can be selected as shown in FIG. Specifically, in step S733, the effect mode selected at that time is determined as the effect mode to be executed, and the determined effect mode is stored (updated) in the determined effect mode storage area provided in the predetermined area of the RAM. Storage) is performed. Then, an effect mode determination image for specifying the effect mode determined in step S733 is displayed as shown in FIG. 33 (d) (step S734). Next, the production mode selection acceptance flag is reset (step S735), and the determination operation detection flag is reset (step S736). Then, image display in the effect mode selected and determined in step S733 is started as shown in FIG. 33E (step S737), and the process is terminated.

  Note that it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received in step S811 of FIG. 85 after the effect mode selection image is displayed in response to the rotation operation in step S730 by the effect mode selection process and before the determination operation is performed ( When it is determined that the variation pattern command flag is set), the process proceeds to the decorative symbol variation start process as shown in steps S812 and S813 of FIG. Then, the image can be switched to an image that displays the decorative design in a variable manner. In such a case, the change in the selection of the production mode is not effective, and the production mode selected before the production mode reception image is displayed is continued.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads data indicating the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S816).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the display result specifying command reception flag is set (step S817). If the display result specifying command reception flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S830. When the display result specifying command reception flag is set, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is displayed according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). Determination is made (step S818).

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol stop pattern in the variable display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 88, when the received display result specifying command indicates a normal jackpot (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the stop design as a stop symbol. A combination of decorative symbols in which the left middle right symbol is an even symbol (usually a stop symbol reminiscent of the occurrence of a big hit) is determined. When the received display result specifying command indicates a probable big hit (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 4 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the left middle right symbol as an odd symbol as an odd symbol. A combination of decorative symbols arranged in accordance with (a stop symbol reminiscent of occurrence of a probable big hit) is determined. When the received display result specifying command indicates a small hit or suddenly probable big hit (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 3 specifying command or a display result 5 specifying command), the presentation control CPU 101 A combination of “135” (a stop symbol reminiscent of the occurrence of a small hit or suddenly probable big hit) is determined as the left middle right decorative symbol as the stop symbol. In the case of a loss (when the received display result specifying command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols with left and right aligned is determined. The combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols derived and displayed on the variable display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the decorative symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbol and the numerical value are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

  As for the decorative symbol, a stop symbol that recalls a big hit is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable big hit symbol, and a stop symbol reminiscent of a normal big hit is called a normal big hit symbol. A stop symbol that suddenly recalls a probable big hit is called a sudden probable big hit symbol, and a stop symbol that recalls a small hit is called a small hit symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 resets the display result specifying command reception flag (step S819). Next, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected (step S833). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S834).

  FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the variable display device 9 in accordance with the data set in the process table. In this embodiment, a process table for error notification (error notification process table) used when various types of error notification are performed is prepared separately from the process table used for normal game effects shown in FIG. ing. Details of the error notification process table will be described later.

  The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the variable display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 89 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 indicates an abnormality notification flag indicating that an abnormal winning notification is being made, and other error flags (a RAM clear flag, a random number circuit error notification flag, a full tank error notification flag, a door opening error notification). On the condition that the medium flag, the ball out error notification flag, and the payout error notification flag) are not set, the production device (production component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, sound number data 1) And control of the variable display device 9 as a speaker and the speaker 27 as a production component (steps S835A and S835B). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9, a command is output to the VDP 109. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice synthesizing IC 173 in order to perform voice output from the speaker 27.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing in order to control various lamps as effect components in accordance with the lamp control execution data 1 (step S835C). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 101 supplies lamp control signals for lighting only the center decoration lamps LEDs 125a to 125f and the stage lamp LEDs 126a to 126f to a predetermined data storage area. set. In addition, when the gaming state is a probable change state, the LED 125a to 125f of the center decoration lamp and the LEDs 126a to 126f of the stage lamp are turned on, and all the lamps provided on the gaming frame 11 side (the upper plate lamp and the lower lamp) Lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f (except for the dish lamp) are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S835C is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis, but the effect control CPU 101 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  When the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, the rendering device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 excluding the lamp control execution data 1 (steps S835A and S835D). In other words, when the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, when the new variable display of the decorative design is started, the display effect by the lamp corresponding to the variable display is not executed. The display effect by the lamp according to the abnormal winning notification and various error notifications (RAM clear notification, random number circuit error notification, full tank error notification, door opening error notification, ball breakage error notification, payout error notification) is continued.

  In addition, when performing the process of step S835D, the CPU 101 for effect control does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. That is, the display on the variable display device 9 (for example, notification of a random number circuit error) and the image of the display effect of the variable display of the decorative design are displayed on the variable display device 9 at the same time. To control. That is, when various error flags are set, when a new variable display of a decorative design is started, not only a display effect corresponding to the variable display is executed, but according to various error notifications. Notification is continued.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, for example, when the abnormality notification flag is set, in step S835D, the effect control CPU 101 starts a new variable display of the decorative symbols, and the upper plate. The abnormal winning notification for blinking the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface of the lamp is continued.

  Further, for example, when the RAM clear flag is set, in step S835D, the effect control CPU 101 starts a new variable display of the decorative symbols and also displays all the lamps (upper lamp, The RAM clear notification for turning on the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f (excluding the lower plate lamp) to output a predetermined error sound is continued.

  Further, for example, when the door opening error notification flag is set, in step S835D, the effect control CPU 101 starts a new variable display of the decorative symbols, and all the lamps on the game frame 11 (upper LED doors 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f (except for the pan lamp and lower pan lamp) blink, and the door open error notification is output to output the sound that the door is open and a predetermined error sound. To do.

  Also, for example, when the ball break error notification flag is set, in step S835D, the effect control CPU 101 starts a new variable display of the decorative symbol and also displays the top frame lamp on the game frame 11 side. The LED 281a to 281l blinks, and the ball break error notification for lighting the upper plate lamp LEDs 882a to 882f is continued.

  Further, for example, when the full tank error notification flag is set, in step S835D, the production control CPU 101 starts a new variable display of the decorative symbols and lights the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower dish lamps. Continue full error notification.

  Also, for example, if the payout error notification flag is set, in step S835D, the effect control CPU 101 starts a new variable display of the decorative symbol and also the LED 281a of the top frame lamp on the game frame 11 side. ˜281 l blinks, and the payout error notification that blinks the upper plate lamp LEDs 882a to 882f continues.

  Further, for example, when the random number circuit error notification flag is set, in step S835D, the effect control CPU 101 starts a new variable display of the decorative symbols, and displays all the lamps on the game frame 11 side and the upper side. The LED 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 882a to 882f of the dish lamp are turned on, a predetermined error sound is output, and random number circuit error notification for displaying “error” on the variable display device 9 is continued.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S836), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S802). (Step S837).

  In step S830, it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command that can be used for both a normal big hit and a probable big hit is received. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, the fluctuation pattern commands of “reach C / shortening”, “reach C”, and “super reach A” are used both in the normal big hit and the probable big hit. This is a variable pattern command. Therefore, the CPU 101 for effect control receives the variation pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit when the data indicating those fluctuation pattern commands is stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area. It is determined that When it is determined that the variation pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit is received, the effect control CPU 101 determines the stop symbol as the normal big hit symbol (step S832). Also, if it is determined that a variation pattern command other than the variation pattern command that can be used for both a normal big hit and a probable big hit is received, the stop symbol is combined with a decorative symbol corresponding to the received variation pattern. (Step S831). In this embodiment, a variation pattern command other than the variation pattern command that can be used for both a normal jackpot and a probable variation jackpot is used at the time of losing or is used according to the type of jackpot ( (See FIG. 47). Therefore, when the variation control command 101 other than the variation pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit is received, the effect control CPU 101 determines the deviation based on the received variation pattern command. Whether or not a big hit (including a small hit) is determined, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the type of the big hit can be specified.

  In this way, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit, and when the display result specifying command cannot be received, Since the display result (stop symbol) is determined to be a normal jackpot symbol, it is possible to make the player recognize whether or not a specific gaming state occurs even if the display result specifying command cannot be received. In addition, by including information that can specify the decorative pattern display result in the variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 100 can display the display result identification command without using a command other than the variation pattern command and the display result identification command. Since the display result of the decorative design can be determined even if it cannot be received, the types of commands transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 do not increase, and as a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 560 does not increase.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 adds and updates the operation unit failure determination count timer by “1” (step S840). The operation unit failure determination count timer is a timer that cumulatively counts the decorative display variation display time as data for determining whether or not the operation unit 81 has failed. The decorative symbol variation display is when the player is playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is a period in which the operation unit 81 is particularly used. In the operation unit failure determination process (FIG. 97) described later, failure determination is performed based on this period (operation unit failure determination count timer value), so that accurate failure determination can be performed.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the process timer (step S841), and 1 is subtracted from the value of the variable time timer (step S842). When the process timer times out (step S843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S844).

  Also, the abnormality notification flag and other error flags (RAM clear flag, random number circuit error flag, full tank error notification flag, door opening error notification flag, ball out error notification flag, payout error notification flag) are not set. As a condition, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data and sound number data set next (steps S845A and S845B).

  In step S845B, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the variable display device 9, for example. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice synthesizing IC 173 in order to output the voice from the speaker 27.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing in order to control various lamps as effect components according to the lamp control execution data (step S845C). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 101 supplies lamp control signals for lighting only the center decoration lamps LEDs 125a to 125f and the stage lamp LEDs 126a to 126f to a predetermined data storage area. set. Further, when the gaming state is a probable change state, the LEDs 125a to 125f of the center decoration lamps and the LEDs 126a to 126f of the stage lamps are turned on, and all the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side (on the hitting ball supply tray 3). Lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f (except for the provided lamp) are set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S845C is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a reach state (step S845D). When it is determined that the vehicle is in the reach state, after performing an operation-time effect process (step S845E) for performing an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 81 during reach as shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the process proceeds to step S846 described later. move on. The operation effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the reach state, the process proceeds to step S846 described later.

  If the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set in step S845A, the contents of process data i (i is any one of 2 to n) (however, excluding sound number data i and lamp control execution data i) .), The rendering device is controlled (steps S845A and S845F). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, the sound effect according to the fluctuating display of the decorative design and the display effect by the lamp are not executed, but the abnormal winning notification and various error notifications are performed. Sound output corresponding to (RAM clear notification, random number circuit error notification, full tank error notification, door open error notification, ball run out error notification, payout error notification, operation unit failure notification) and display effects by lamps are continued.

  In addition, when the process of step S845F is performed, the presentation control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. . Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag or other error flag is set, not only the display effect according to the fluctuating display of the decorative design is executed, but the notification according to the abnormal winning notification or various error notifications is performed. Will continue.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S846), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S848). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S847), the process proceeds to step S848. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, if the design confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to stopping the fluctuation. Even in such a case, the variation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol has ended).

  FIG. 91 and FIG. 92 are flowcharts showing the operational effect process (step S845E) in the decorative symbol variation process. In the effect process at the time of operation, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process.

  First, based on the process data being executed, it is determined whether or not the current reach state is a type of reach requiring a rotation operation (for example, when the above reach D, reach E, or reach F is displayed). Judgment is made (step S751). If it is determined that the type of reach requiring the rotation operation is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S764 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a type of reach that requires a rotation operation, is the rotation operation request period for requesting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 based on the process data being executed and the value of the process timer? It is determined whether or not (step S752). Here, the rotation operation request period is a period in which the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 is received, and is a period in which, for example, mini-games such as (c) and (d) in FIGS. 34 and 35 are executed. .

  When it is determined that it is not the rotation operation request period, the process proceeds to step S757 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the rotation operation request period, it is determined whether or not the rotation operation detection flag is set (step S753). When it is determined that the rotation operation detection flag is not set, the LED that guides the operation of the rotation operation unit, that is, the operation unit center lamp 82A emits blue light to “turn on the pressing operation unit 811!” A serial setting process is executed to perform a rotation operation guidance light emission operation that guides the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 812 by lighting up a character string such as a blinking (step S754), and step S757. Proceed to On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation operation detection flag is set, the variable display device 9 is controlled according to the rotation operation (step S755). Specifically, in step S755, the mallet 908 is operated by a predetermined amount of movement for each rotation amount of one click in the air hockey mini game images as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 (c) and 35 (d). While displaying, the display which advances a mini game is performed, such as the pack 907 being knocked back according to the operation of the mallet 908. Next, the rotation operation detection flag is reset (step S756), and the process proceeds to step S757.

  Here, an example is shown in which a display for operating the mallet 908 by a predetermined operation amount is shown for each rotation amount for one click. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control for displaying the mallet 908 by a predetermined amount of operation may be performed for each amount of rotation for a plurality of clicks in the same rotation direction.

  In step S757, based on the process data being executed, it is determined whether or not the current reach state is a super-reach effect display time. Specifically, in step S757, it is determined whether or not it is during the execution of an effect that specifies the super reach as shown in (e) to (i) of FIG. If it is determined that it is not during the performance of specifying the super reach, the process is terminated. In the case of reach E in which the effect of specifying the super reach as shown in FIG. 35 is not executed, even if the determination operation is performed on the operation unit 81, display corresponding to the operation is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during execution of an effect that specifies super-reach, based on the process data being executed, the pressing operation unit 811 as shown in FIGS. It is determined whether or not it is a period for requesting a pressing operation (step S758).

  When it is determined that it is not the period for requesting the pressing operation, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the period for requesting the pressing operation, it is determined whether or not the above-described determination operation detection flag or any one of the direction selection operation detection flags is set (step S759).

  When it is determined that such a flag is not set, the LED for guiding the operation of the determination operation unit, that is, the operation unit center lamp 82A emits red light to “press!” On the pressing operation unit 811! A serial setting process is executed to perform a pressing operation guidance light emission operation for guiding the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 811 by blinking display of a character string such as (or lighting display) (step S760). finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that such a flag is set, the variable display device 9 is controlled in accordance with the determination operation or the direction selection operation (step S761). Specifically, in step S761, in the chance display as shown in FIG. 34 (g), the power displayed in the form of a bar graph in accordance with the increase in the number of pressing operations by the determination operation of the pressing operation unit 811 or the direction selection operation. Display to increase the value of. Note that the operation of the operation unit 81 is not involved in the effect in the effect display image that determines the stop symbol of the center ornament symbol displayed according to the accumulated power as shown in FIGS. 34 (h) and 34 (i). So it is done according to the process data. Then, in response to the determination operation or the direction selection operation of the pressing operation unit 811, LEDs corresponding to the determination operation (for example, the first pressing operation unit lamp 82 a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82 d) are caused to emit light. Therefore, serial setting processing is executed (step S762). Next, the set operation detection flag is reset (step S763), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S751 that it is not the type of reach that requires a rotating operation, the pressing operation unit as shown in FIGS. It is determined whether or not it is a period for requesting the direction selection operation 811 (step S764). When it is determined that it is not the period for requesting the direction selection operation, the process proceeds to step S771 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the period for requesting the direction selection operation, it is determined whether any of the direction selection operation detection flags described above is set (step S765).

  When it is determined that any one of the direction selection operation detection flags is not set, the LEDs for guiding the operation of the direction selection operation unit, that is, four LEDs of the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d. Guides the user to perform a direction selection operation to operate any of the four parts of the forward operation portion, the rearward operation portion, the leftward operation portion, and the rightward operation portion by blinking the lamp (may be turned on). The serial setting process for executing the serial setting process for performing the operation guidance light emission operation is executed (step S766), and the process proceeds to step S771 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that any one of the direction selection operation detection flags is set, a character is selected according to the direction selection operation (step S767). Specifically, in step S767, a character is selected every time a direction is selected. For example, in the initial state, the character A is selected, the character A is selected when the forward direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is operated, and the character character is selected when the left direction portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is operated. A direction selection operation is performed by selecting B, selecting character C when the rear direction portion of the pressing operation unit 811 is operated, and selecting character D when the right direction portion of the pressing operation unit 811 is operated. To select a character.

  In step S766 described above, there are four characters to be selected, and the direction in which one of the four parts of the pressing operation unit 811 including the front direction portion, the rear direction portion, the left direction portion, and the right direction portion is operated. Since it is necessary to perform a selection operation, an example in which an operation guidance light emission operation for blinking four lamps of the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when two images indicating the character to be selected are displayed side by side, the direction selection for operating one of the left direction part and the right direction part of the pressing operation unit 811 is performed. Since it is necessary to perform an operation, it is only necessary to perform an operation guidance light-emitting operation in which only two pressing operation unit lamps corresponding to the left direction part and the right direction part are blinked. In other words, in the operation guidance light emitting operation, only the lamp corresponding to the portion that needs to be operated may be blinked (may be lit) in relation to the image displayed on the display screen.

  Then, a character selection image for specifying the character selected in step S767 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 36B and 36C (step S768). Then, in response to the direction selection operation of the pressing operation unit 811 being performed, the LED corresponding to the direction selection operation among the four lamps of the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d, that is, Then, serial setting processing is executed to turn on the lamp corresponding to the operated direction (step S769). Next, the set direction selection operation detection flag is reset (step S770), and the process proceeds to step S771.

  In step S771, based on the process data being executed, it is determined whether or not the direction selection operation has ended, that is, whether or not a predetermined time for accepting the direction selection operation has elapsed. If it is determined that the direction selection operation has not ended, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the direction selection operation has ended, the character selected at that time is determined as the character to be selected and determined (step S772), and the selected and determined character is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM. The process of storing in the determined character storage area is performed. Then, the variable display device 9 is controlled according to the character determined in step S772 (step S773), and the process returns. Specifically, in step S773, processing for displaying the character image determined in step S772 as shown in FIG. 36D is started.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the confirmed command reception flag is set (step S851). If the confirmed command reception flag is set, the confirmed command reception flag is reset. Then, control is performed to derive and display the determined stop symbol (step S853). Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be a big hit (step S854). Whether or not it is determined to be a big hit is confirmed by, for example, a display result specifying command stored in the display result specifying command storage area. In this embodiment, it can be confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit based on the determined stop symbol.

  When it is determined to be a big hit, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S855).

  If it is determined not to win, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the time reduction state flag is set (step S856). The short time state flag is set when the gaming state is a short time state (see step S886 described later). In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the short-time state, the short-time state is terminated when a big hit occurs, or the special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Even if a big hit does not occur, control is performed so as to end the time-saving state. For this reason, the effect control CPU 101 first increments the value of the hour / short variation counter when the hour / short state flag is set (step S857).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the time-varying variation number counter is 100 (step S858). If the value of the hour / short fluctuation counter is 100, the hour / short state flag is reset (step S859). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S860).

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variation (variable display) of the decorative symbols on the condition that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (see steps S851 and S853). However, if the variation time timer based on the received variation pattern command times out, the variation of the decorative symbol may be controlled to end without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of variable display.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the jackpot end effect timer is set (step S880). If the big hit end effect timer is set, the process proceeds to step S885. If the jackpot end effect timer is not set, a jackpot end designation command reception flag (a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot termination designation command has been received is set. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S881). When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set, the jackpot end designation command reception flag is reset (step S882), and a value corresponding to the jackpot end display time is set in the jackpot end presentation timer (step S883). Then, the variable display device 9 is controlled to display a jackpot end screen (screen for informing the end of the jackpot game) (step S884). Specifically, an instruction to display the big hit end screen is given to the VDP 109.

  In this embodiment, even if the type of jackpot is different, the same jackpot end screen is displayed on the variable display device 9. For example, the big hit end display and the small hit end display are the same. However, the big hit end display (including the small hit end display) may be divided according to the type of the big hit.

  In step S885, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end effect timer. Then, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end effect timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed (step S886). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the time reduction state flag is set (step S887), and the time reduction number counter is set to 0 (step S888). If the jackpot end 1 designation command is received, the probability variation state flag is reset (steps S889 and S891). When the jackpot end 1 designation command has not been received (when the jackpot end 2 designation command has been received), the probability variation state flag is set (steps S889, S890). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S892).

  The probability change state flag and the time reduction state flag are used, for example, when the effect control CPU 101 notifies the probability change state and the time reduction state by the background or the decorative light emitter (lamp / LED) in the variable display device 9.

  FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a notification screen displayed on the variable display device 9. FIG. 95 (A) shows an example of an initial screen displayed on the variable display device 9 by the presentation control CPU 101 in response to reception of the initialization designation command. FIG. 95 (B) shows an example of a power failure recovery screen displayed on the variable display device 9 by the production control CPU 101 in response to reception of a power failure recovery designation command.

  Next, the notification control process process in step S707 will be described. First, various error notification modes executed in the notification control process will be described. FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of various error notification modes executed in the notification control process. As shown in FIG. 96, the RAM clear notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 31 seconds) after the gaming machine is turned on. When performing the RAM clear notification, the effect control CPU 101 lights the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side, and causes a predetermined error sound to the speaker 27. Control (for example, beep sound) is output.

  The door opening error notification is executed while the game frame 11 is opened (for example, while the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155 is input). When performing the door opening error notification, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to blink the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) on the game frame 11 side. In addition, control is performed so that a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound) is output to the speaker 27 together with a sound “door is open”.

  Further, the ball break error notification is executed from the occurrence of a ball break until the ball break state is canceled (for example, while a detection signal of a ball break switch is input). When performing the ball break error notification, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to blink the top lamps 882a to 882f of the top frame lamps on the game frame 11 side and to light the upper pan lamps 882a to 882f. The full tank error notification is executed from the occurrence of the full tank state of the lower pan until the full tank state is canceled (for example, while the detection signal of the full tank switch is input). The effect control CPU 101 performs control to blink the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower pan lamps when performing full tank error notification.

  Also, the payout error notification is executed from the occurrence of the prize ball abnormality until the prize ball abnormality state is canceled. When performing the payout error notification, the effect control CPU 101 performs control of blinking the LED 281a to 281l of the top frame lamp on the game frame 11 side and blinking the LEDs 882a to 882f of the upper plate lamp. Further, the random number circuit error notification is executed until the power is turned off after the random number circuit error is detected when the gaming machine is turned on. When performing the random number circuit error notification, the effect control CPU 101 lights up all the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 882a to 882f of the game frame 11 side and the upper plate lamp, and also generates a predetermined error sound. Control (for example, beep sound) is output. In addition, control is performed to display “error” on the variable display device 9. In this case, when display by a game effect (for example, variable display of decorative symbols) is performed on the variable display device 9, a character string “error” is superimposed on the variable display device 9.

  The abnormal winning error notification is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the occurrence of the abnormal winning. The effect control CPU 101 performs control for blinking the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f only on the side surface of the upper plate lamp when performing an abnormal winning notification.

  Further, the operation unit failure notification is notified while it is determined that the operation unit 81 is in failure (during failure) or during a predetermined fixed period. When performing the operation unit failure notification, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to turn on the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamps on the game frame 11 side, and performs control to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Next, the operation unit failure determination process in step S709 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an operation unit failure determination process (step S709) in the main process. In the operation unit failure determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the failure determination operation detection flag is set (step S781). The failure determination operation detection flag is a flag that is set based on the detection of the operation of the pressing operation unit 811 (see step S976 in the serial input / output process, FIG. 113). If set (Y in step S781), the effect control CPU 101 resets the failure determination operation detection flag (step S782) and resets the operation unit failure determination count timer (step S783). Then, the process is finished. If the failure determination operation detection flag is not set (N in step S781), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the operation unit failure determination count timer value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 30 days). Confirmation is made (step S784). If the operation unit failure determination count timer value is 30 days or more (Y in step S784), the effect control CPU 101 sets the operation unit failure flag (step S785). Then, the process is finished.

  In this embodiment, the example in which the pressing operation unit 811 is a failure determination target of the operation unit 81 in the operation unit 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation unit failure determination process is performed with the rotation operation unit 812 as the failure determination target of the operation unit 81. When it is determined that there is a failure, the above-described notification regarding the failure of the operation unit is performed. It may be. In addition, the operation unit failure determination process is performed with both of the pressing operation unit 811 and the rotation operation unit 812 as the failure determination target of the operation unit 81. You may make it perform.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the notification control process (step S707) in the main process. In the notification control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S1900 and S1901 according to the value of the notification control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  The notification start processing (step S1900) includes error flags (initial notification flag, random number circuit error flag, abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag, RAM clear flag, full error notification flag, payout error notification flag set in the command analysis processing. Is a process of starting error notification based on the ball break error notification flag. When the error notification is started, the value of the notification control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the notification process (step S1901).

  The notifying process (step S1901) includes error flags (initial notifying flag, random number circuit error notifying flag, abnormality notifying flag, RAM clear flag, full error notifying flag, payout error notifying flag, out of ball error notifying. This is a process for continuing the error notification based on the middle flag. Further, the error notification is terminated based on the fact that an error notification period (initial notification period, RAM clear notification period) has elapsed or an error notification release flag set in the command analysis process. When the error notification is finished, the value of the notification control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1901).

  99 to 101 are flowcharts showing notification start processing (step S1900) in the notification control process shown in FIG. In the notification start process, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S1911). If set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the initial notification period value in the period timer 1 (step S1912). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of the initialization designation command. The effect control CPU 101 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses. The initial notification period is the same as the prohibition period set by the game control microcomputer 560 in step S45. Therefore, the abnormality notification designation command is not received when the initialization notification is performed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the initial notification flag and sets an initial notification flag indicating that the initial notification is being performed (step S1912A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the initial notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the door opening error notification flag is set (step S1913). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the door opening error (step S1914). In this embodiment, error process data (error process data) for controlling the speaker 27 and the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 882a to 882d when various error notifications are performed. Prepared in advance. Details of the error process data will be described later.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1915) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the error process data 1 (step S1916). For example, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound) together with a sound such as “the door is open”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 882a to 882d to set a lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area (see FIG. 111). ) Is executed (step S1917). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sends lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. Set to. The lamp control signal set in step S1917 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the door opening error notification flag and sets a door opening error notification flag indicating that the door opening error notification is being performed (step S1917A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, a case in which abnormal winning notification is performed without notice of an unauthorized person by blinking the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f only on the side surface of the upper plate lamp will be described. However, the door opening error notification effect may be performed by lighting or blinking the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f only on the side surface side of the upper plate lamp. In such a case, even when an irregularity action such as opening the door of the gaming machine 1 and performing some work on the inside is performed, fraud can be notified without being noticed by the fraudster.

  If the door opening error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the random number circuit error flag is set (step S1918). If set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a random number circuit error display screen indicating that it is a random number circuit error on the variable display device 9 (step S1919). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the random circuit error (step S1920). Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1921) and controls the speaker 27 according to the contents of the error process data 1 (step S1922). For example, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 882a to 882d ( Step S1923). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sends lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. Set to. The lamp control signal set in step S1923 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the random number circuit error flag and sets a random number circuit error notification flag indicating that the random number circuit error notification is being performed (step S1923A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the random number circuit error flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set (step S1924). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects error process data for performing lamp control in response to the abnormal winning notification (step S1925). Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1926) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the error process data 1 (step S1927). For example, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface side of the upper plate lamp (step S1928). . For example, the effect control CPU 101 sets lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 882a and 882b on the left side and the LEDs 882e and 882f on the right side of the upper plate lamp in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1928 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to the frame side IC substrate 605A disposed on the back side of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3.

  If any game effect (for example, a big hit effect or a decorative pattern change display) is performed when the abnormal winning notification is given, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the effect control CPU 101 is on the side of the upper plate lamp in step S1928. A lamp control signal for controlling the LED of the lamp corresponding to the currently executed game effect is set in a predetermined data storage area together with a lamp control signal for controlling the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f. Therefore, for example, in a game effect, when the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of the top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, and the right frame lamp are flashing, the top frame lamp and the left frame lamp In addition, the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of the right frame lamp continue to blink, and the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side of the upper plate lamp are blinked. By doing so, the game effect continues from the front side of the gaming machine 1 in exactly the same manner before and after the start of the abnormal prize notification, and from the side of the gaming machine 1 the upper plate lamp By confirming the blinking state of the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface side, it is possible to confirm whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred. Therefore, without notice of a fraudulent person on the front side of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to notify the game store clerk or the like on the side surface of the gaming machine 1 of the occurrence of an abnormal winning and inform that the fraudulent act has been performed. be able to.

  Thereafter, sound output (output of an abnormal alarm sound) and lamp display (abnormal alarm flashing) corresponding to the abnormal winning notification are performed. Then, the production control CPU 101 resets the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag and sets an abnormal notification flag indicating that abnormal notification is being performed (step S1929). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  It should be noted that the confirmation of whether or not the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set is made before confirming whether or not the random number circuit error flag is set. The notification start process may be executed in preference to the random number circuit error notification start process in steps S1918 to S1923A. By doing so, it is possible to notify the occurrence of an abnormal prize prior to the occurrence of a random circuit error. Therefore, it is possible to notify the game store clerk and the like by giving priority to the occurrence of an abnormal winning due to an illegal act, and more effectively notify the occurrence of the illegal act.

  If the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step S1930). If set, the effect control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the RAM clear notification (step S1931). The RAM clear notification is processing for notifying that the initialization process has been executed and the RAM has been cleared.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1932) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the error process data 1 (step S1933). For example, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f (step S1934). For example, the effect control CPU 101 outputs lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the upper plate lamp and the lower plate lamp) provided in the game frame 11. Set to a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1934 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604. Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the RAM clear notification period value in the period timer 2 (step S1935). The RAM clear notification period is a period during which the RAM clear notification is being notified. When the RAM clear notification period elapses, the effect control CPU 101 ends the RAM clear notification. The initial notification period and the RAM clear notification period may be the same period.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the RAM clear flag and sets a RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear notification is being performed (step S1935A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the RAM clear flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the full error notification flag is set (step S1936). If set, the production control CPU 101 performs control to display a full-tank error display screen on the variable display device 9 indicating that it is a full-tan error (step S1937). Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to a full tank error (step S1938). Next, the production control CPU 101 starts an error process timer (step S1939) and controls the speaker 27 according to the content of the error process data 1 (step S1940). For example, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 so as to output a sound such as “the bottom plate is full”.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control the lower pan lamps 84a to 84f (step S1941). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sets lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower pan lamps provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1941 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to the frame side IC substrate 605B.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the full tank error notification flag and sets a full tank error notification flag indicating that a full tank error notification is being performed (step S1941A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  If the full tank error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the payout error notification flag is set (step S1942). If set, the production control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the payout error (step S1943) and starts an error process timer (step S1944).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control the lamps 281a to 281l and 882a to 882f (step S1945). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sets lamp control signals for blinking the LED 281a to 281l and 882a to 882f of the top and bottom lamps provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1945 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the frame side IC substrates 602 and 605A.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 resets the payout error notification flag and sets a payout error notification flag indicating that the payout error notification is being performed (step S1945A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  In this embodiment, when a payout error is notified, only the notification process using the lamp is performed and the notification process using the speaker 27 is not performed. However, the speaker 27 is used in addition to the lamp. You may make it perform notification which was.

  If the payout error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the ball break error notification flag is set (step S1946). If set, the production control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the ball break error (step S1947) and starts an error process timer (step S1948).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l and 882a to 882f (step S1949). For example, the effect control CPU 101 causes the top frame lamp LEDs 281a to 281l provided in the game frame 11 to blink, and sets lamp control signals for lighting the upper pan lamp LEDs 882a to 882f in a predetermined data storage area. To do. The lamp control signal set in step S1949 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the frame side IC substrates 602 and 605A.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets the ball-out error notification flag and sets a ball-out error notification flag indicating that the ball-out error notification is being performed (step S1949A). Then, control goes to a step S1950.

  In this embodiment, a case where only a notification process using a lamp is performed and a notification process using sound using the speaker 27 is not performed when a prize ball error is notified is described. The used notification may be performed.

  If the out-of-ball error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the operation unit failure flag is set (step S1951). If set, the production control CPU 101 selects error process data corresponding to the operation unit failure (step S1952) and starts an error process timer (step S1953).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing for setting the lamp control signal in a predetermined data storage area in order to control each of the lamps 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 82A, 82a to 82l. (Step S1954). For example, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for turning on the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided in the game frame 11 in a predetermined data storage area. Note that the lamp control signal set in step S1954 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606 and 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602. After step S1954, the process proceeds to step S1950.

  In step S1950, the effect control CPU 101 changes the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during notification (step S1901), and ends the processing.

  102 to 105 are flowcharts showing the notification-in-progress process (step S1901) in the notification control process shown in FIG. In the notifying process, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the initial notifying flag is set (step S1960). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1965. If the initial notification flag is set, the value of the timer 1 set in step S1912 is decremented by 1 (step S1961). When the value of the period timer 1 becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed, the initial notification flag is reset (steps S1962, S1963). If the value of the period timer 1 is not 0, the process is terminated as it is.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for deleting the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the variable display device 9 (step S1964). The VDP 109 erases the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the variable display device 9 in response to the command. Then, the process proceeds to step S2010.

  If the initial notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the door opening error notification flag is set (step S1965). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1971. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S1966), and when the error process timer times out (step S1967), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S1968).

  FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of an error notification process table. The error notification process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 performs control of the effect device and performs various error notifications is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 performs error notification by controlling the speaker 27 and each lamp in accordance with data set in the error notification process table. The error notification process table includes data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, error lamp control execution data, and error sound number data. In the process timer set value, the duration in the sound output state and the lamp display state is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the error notification process table and controls the lighting / non-lighting state of each lamp in a manner set in the lamp display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. The sound output using the speaker 27 is controlled.

  The error notification process table shown in FIG. 106 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The error notification process table is prepared according to the error type (RAM clear notification, random number circuit error, full tank error, door opening error, ball breakage error, payout error). Further, in this embodiment, every time the error process timer times out, the lighting of the pattern A and the lighting of the pattern B are switched, and the lighting or blinking is controlled. In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 controls the display state of each lamp and outputs an error notification by outputting a predetermined error sound from the speaker 27 (in this example, RAM clear notification, door opening). In the case of error notification and random number circuit error notification), error notification is performed using an error notification process table (see FIG. 106A) including error sound number data in addition to error lamp control execution data. . In addition, in the case where the effect control CPU 101 performs error notification by controlling only the display state of each lamp (in this example, abnormal winning error notification, out of ball error notification, full tank error notification, payout error notification) Error notification is performed using an error notification process table including only error lamp control execution data (see FIG. 106B).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1969). In step S1969, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding error notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the production control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a sound “the door is open” and a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1970). For example, in step S1970, the effect control CPU 101 generates lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. Set to a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1970 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the door opening error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the random number circuit error notification flag is set (step S1971). If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S1972), and when the error process timer times out (step S1973), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S1974).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1975). In step S1975, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding error notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the effect control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1976). For example, in step S1976, the effect control CPU 101 outputs lamp control signals for lighting the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. Set to a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1976 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  If the random circuit error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether the abnormality notification flag is set (step S1977). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1984. If set, the variable display device 9 outputs a command to superimpose and display the abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time to the VDP 109 (step S1978). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays the abnormality notification screen on the variable display device 9 according to the command.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S1979), and when the error process timer times out (step S1980), the error notification process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S1981).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing in order to control each lamp in accordance with the abnormal winning notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1983). In step S1983, the effect control CPU 101 sets lamp control signals for blinking the LEDs 882a and 882b on the left side and the LEDs 882e and 882f on the right side of the upper plate lamp in a predetermined data storage area. The ramp control signal set in step S1983 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and the hit ball supply tray (upper Dish) 3 is output to each frame side IC substrate 605A arranged on the back side.

  If the abnormality notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step S1984). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1993. If the RAM clear flag is set, the process timer is decremented by 1 (step S1985), and the value of the timer 2 set in step S1935 is decremented by 1 (step S1986). When the process timer times out (step S1987), the error notification process data is switched. That is, the error notification process data set next in the error process table is set, and the process timer set value is set in the process timer (step S1988).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S1989). In step S1989, the production control CPU 101 outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the speech synthesis IC 173 to cause the speaker 27 to output a sound. For example, the effect control CPU 101 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control various lamps as effect components in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1990). In step S1990, the effect control CPU 101 turns on the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the upper plate lamp and the lower plate lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side. A control signal is set in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1990 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to each frame side IC substrate 602 to 604.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the period timer 2 has become 0 (step S1991). When the value of the period timer 2 becomes 0, that is, when the RAM clear notification period has elapsed, the RAM clear flag is reset (step S1992), and the process proceeds to step S2010. If the value of the period timer 2 has not timed out, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the RAM clear flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the full tank error notification flag is set (step S1993). If not set, the process proceeds to step S1999. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S1994), and when the error process timer times out (step S1995), switches the error notification process data. That is, the error notification process data set next in the error process table is set, and the process timer set value is set in the error process timer (step S1996).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S1998). For example, in step S1998, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for blinking the LEDs 84a to 84f of the lower pan lamps in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S1998 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Is output to the frame side IC substrate 605B.

  If the full-tank error notification flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the payout error notification flag is set (step S1999). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2005. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S2000), and when the error process timer times out (step S2001), switches the error notification process data. That is, the error notification process data set next in the error process table is set, and the process timer set value is set in the error process timer (step S2002).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S2003). For example, in step S2003, the effect control CPU 101 sets lamp control signals for blinking the top and bottom lamps 281a to 281l and 882a to 882f provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. To do. The lamp control signal set in step S2003 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the frame side IC substrates 602 and 605A.

  If the payout error notification flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the ball break error notification flag is set (step S2004). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2010. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S2005), and when the error process timer times out (step S2006), switches the error notification process data. That is, the error notification process data set next in the error process table is set, and the process timer set value is set in the error process timer (step S2007).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S2008). For example, in step S2008, the production control CPU 101 blinks the LEDs 281a to 281l of the top frame lamps provided on the game frame 11 side, and gives a lamp control signal for lighting the LEDs 882a to 882f of the upper dish lamps. Set in the data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2008 is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 and 605A.

  If the ball breaking notification flag is not set in step S2004, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation unit failure flag is set (step S2008a). If not set, the process proceeds to step S2009. If set, the production control CPU 101 decrements the error process timer by 1 (step S2008b), and when the error process timer times out (step S2008c), switches the error notification process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the error process table is set in the error process timer (step S2008d).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls the speaker 27 based on the error sound number data (step S2008e). In step S2008e, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output corresponding to the corresponding error notification to the speech synthesis IC 173. The voice synthesis IC 173 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 174, and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. For example, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a predetermined error sound (for example, a beep sound).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 executes serial setting processing to control each lamp according to the corresponding error notification in accordance with the error lamp control execution data (step S2008f). For example, in step S2008f, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lamp control signal for turning on the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side in a predetermined data storage area. The lamp control signal set in step S2008f is output to the serial output circuit 353 in the serial input / output process (step S708) in the main process, converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and relay boards 606, 607. Are output to the board side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602 to 604.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104, when a ball break error or a payout error is notified, sound output from the speaker 27 is not performed, but a ball break error or a prize ball error is notified. In addition, sound output control using the speaker 27 may be performed.

  In step S2009, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not an error notification release flag is set. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S2010. If it is not set, the process is terminated as it is. In step S2010, the production control CPU 101 changes the value of the notification control process flag to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1900), and ends the process.

  By executing the processing as described above, notification of various errors is executed. Further, the error notification is executed in the order of initial notification, door opening error notification, random number circuit error notification, abnormal winning notification, RAM clear notification, full tank error notification, payout error notification and ball runout error notification.

  The effect control CPU 101 determines Y in steps S1960, S1965, S1971, S1977, S1984, S1993, S1999, and S2004, then an initial notification flag, a door opening error notification flag, a random number circuit error notification flag, It is determined whether any one or more of an abnormality notification flag, a RAM clear flag, a full tank error notification flag, a payout error notification flag, a ball breakage error notification flag, and an operation unit failure flag are set. It may be. If it is set, the value of the notification control process flag may be changed to a value corresponding to the notification start process (step S1900), and the notification start process may be repeated.

  Next, a lamp control signal set in a predetermined data storage area according to the error lamp control execution data will be described. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a lamp control signal output as a serial data method in the notification control process. As shown in FIG. 107, in this embodiment, two patterns of error lamp control execution data (pattern A and pattern B) are used for each error type. In this embodiment, the blinking display of the lamp is controlled by switching and using the error lamp control execution data for the pattern A and the pattern B. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the lamp control signal shown in FIG. 107 in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area provided in advance in the ROM in association with the error lamp control execution data. Then, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a lamp control signal from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area based on the error lamp control execution data, and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353.

  As shown in FIG. 107, each lamp control signal is stored in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area with the address of the output destination serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 added thereto. For example, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 610 that supplies a control signal to some of the LEDs 281a to 281f among the ceiling lamps is “00”, the address “0000” is stored in the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp. "Is added and stored. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 that supplies the control signal to the other part of the top lamps 281g to 281l is “01”, the address of the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp is addressed. Stored with “0001” added. Since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 612 that supplies the control signal to the LEDs 283a to 283f of the right frame lamp is “02”, the address “0010” is added to the 8-digit data body for controlling the lamp. Stored in state. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 613 that supplies the control signal to the LEDs 282a to 282f of the left frame lamp is “03”, the address “0011” is added to the 8-digit data main body for controlling the lamp. Stored in state.

  In the case of RAM clear notification, as shown in FIG. 107, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 613 having addresses “00” to “03”. Is done. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281a of all the lamps (excluding the upper plate lamp and the lower plate lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f are turned on. In addition, when the RAM clear notification is made, the same lamp control signal is output when the error lamp control execution data is pattern A and pattern B. Therefore, during the error notification, the game frame 11 side LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the upper plate lamp and the lower plate lamp) are continuously turned on.

  In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 610, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 281a, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 281b, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 281c, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 281d corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281e, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281f. In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 281g, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 281h, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 281i, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 281j, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281k, and the sixth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 281l. In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 612, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 283a, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 283b, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 283c, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 283d corresponds to the input signal to the LED 283e, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 283f. In the ramp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 613, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 282a, the second bit is an input signal to the LED 282b, the third bit is an input signal to the LED 282c, and the fourth bit is The input signal to the LED 282d corresponds to the input signal to the LED 282e, the fifth bit corresponds to the input signal to the LED 282f.

  When notifying the door opening error, as shown in FIG. 107, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, each serial-parallel conversion IC 610 having addresses from “00” to “03” is selected. In 613, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281a of all the lamps (excluding the upper plate lamp and the lower plate lamp) provided on the game frame 11 side 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f are turned on. At the time of process data switching, the control data body is “00000000” in the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 613 whose addresses are “00” to “03” based on the error lamp control execution data for pattern B. A lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off. Is done. When notifying the door opening error by repeating such control, the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are blinked at predetermined time intervals. Control is performed.

  When notifying a ball break error, as shown in FIG. 107, first, serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 and 611 having addresses “00” and “01” based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, respectively. In addition, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on. Further, at the time of process data switching, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B, the serial data to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 and 611 having addresses “00” and “01” and the lamp whose control data body is “00000000” are used. A control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 0 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned off. By repeating such control, when notifying a ball-out error, control is performed such that the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side blink at predetermined time intervals.

  Further, when notifying the ball break error, as shown in FIG. 107, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 whose address is “04”. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs 882a to 882f of the upper pan lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 882a to 882f of the upper pan lamp are turned on. In addition, when a ball break error is notified, since the same lamp control signal is output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 when the error lamp control execution data is pattern A and pattern B, an error occurs. During the notification, the upper plate lamp LEDs 882a to 882f are continuously turned on.

  In the lamp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, the first bit is an input signal to the LED 882a on the left side of the upper plate lamp, and the second bit is an input signal to the LED 882b on the left side of the upper plate lamp. The eye is the input signal to the LED 882c on the front of the upper plate lamp, the fourth bit is the input signal to the LED 882d on the front of the upper plate lamp, the fifth bit is the input signal to 882e on the right side of the upper plate lamp, and the sixth bit is the upper plate This corresponds to an input signal to the right side 882f of the lamp.

  When notifying a full tank error, as shown in FIG. 107, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, the control data body is “00111111” in the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05”. Lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower dish lamps are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 882a to 882d of the dish lamps are turned on. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05” based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern B. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the lower pan lamp are all 0 is output, and the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower pan lamps are turned off. By repeating such control, when a full tank error is notified, control is performed such that only the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower pan lamp blink at a predetermined time interval.

  In the lamp control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615, the first bit is an input signal to the lower plate lamp LED 884a, the second bit is the input signal to the lower plate lamp LED 884b, and the third bit is the lower plate. The input signal to the LED 884c of the lamp, the fourth bit is the input signal to the LED 884d of the lower pan lamp, the fifth bit is the input signal to the LED 884e of the lower pan lamp, and the sixth bit is the input signal to the LED 884f of the lower pan lamp It corresponds.

  When notifying the payout error, as shown in FIG. 107, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 and 614 with addresses “00” and “04” are controlled. The lamp control signal whose data body is “00111111” is transmitted, and the lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is “01”. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the ceiling lamp and the LEDs of the upper dish lamp are all 1 is output, and a part of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side is output. The LEDs 281a to 281f and the upper plate lamp LEDs 882a to 882f are turned on. Further, when the process data is switched, the lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transferred to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 and 614 with addresses “00” and “04” based on the error lamp control execution data for pattern B. And a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 611 whose address is “01”. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of all the bits corresponding to the other part of the ceiling lamps are all 1 is output, and the other part of the ceiling lamps 281g to 281g˜ Only 281l is lit. When notifying a payout error by repeating such control, the LED 281a to 281f and the LEDs 281g to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are alternately blinked at predetermined time intervals, and the upper plate Control is performed such that the lamps 882a to 882f blink at predetermined time intervals.

  When notifying a random circuit error, as shown in FIG. 107, the lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is sent to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 614 whose addresses are “00” to “04”. Is sent. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 1 is output, and the LED 281a of the top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, the right frame lamp, and the upper plate lamp provided on the game frame 11 side. ˜281 l, 282 a to 282 f, 283 a to 283 f, and 882 a to 882 f are turned on. In addition, when a random number circuit error is notified, the same lamp control signal is output when the error lamp control execution data is pattern A and pattern B. The LED 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, and 882a to 882f of the top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, the right frame lamp, and the upper plate lamp provided on the 11 side are continuously lit.

  When notifying an abnormal winning error, as shown in FIG. 107, first, based on the error lamp control execution data of pattern A, the control data body is “00110011” in the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 whose address is “04”. Lamp control signal is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs on the left and right sides of the upper plate lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 882a and 882b on the left side and the LEDs 882e and 882f on the right side of the upper plate lamp are output. Illuminated. As described above, in the control signal output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, 1 of the first bit is an input signal to the LED 882a on the left side, and 1 of the second bit is an input signal to the LED 882b on the left side. The fifth bit 1 corresponds to the input signal to the right side LED 882e, and the sixth bit 1 corresponds to the input signal to the right side LED 882f.

  At the time of process data switching, based on the error lamp control execution data for pattern B, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614 whose address is “04”. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the upper plate lamp are all 0 is output, and all the LEDs 882a to 882f of the upper plate lamp are turned off.

  When notifying the operation unit failure, as shown in FIG. 107, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111111” is sent to each of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 and 612 having addresses “01” and “02”. Sent. That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of the ceiling lamp are all 1 is output, and the LEDs 281a to 281l of the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are turned on. Further, when notifying the operation unit failure, since the lamp control signal having the same content is output when the error lamp control execution data is the pattern A and the pattern B, the operation unit failure notification is being executed. The LEDs 281a to 281l of all the ceiling lamps provided on the game frame 11 side are continuously turned on.

  When an abnormal winning error is notified by repeatedly performing the above-described control, the LED 82a, 82b, 82e, and 82f provided on the side surface of the upper lamp are blinked at predetermined time intervals.

  If any game effect (for example, a big hit effect or a decorative pattern change display) is performed when the abnormal winning notification is given, the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f provided on the side surface of the upper plate lamp are used. Display control is performed, and display control of the top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, the right frame lamp, and the lower pan lamp is performed according to the game effect. In this case, a ramp control signal corresponding to the abnormal winning notification shown in FIG. 107 is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 614, and at the same time, the other serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 613, 615 also have a lamp corresponding to the game effect. A control signal is transmitted.

  It should be noted that not only abnormal winning notification but also full tank error notification is performed, if any game effect (for example, big hit effect or decorative symbol variation display) is being performed, the display of LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower plate lamps While the control is performed, display control of the top frame lamp, the left frame lamp, the right frame lamp, and the upper plate lamp may be performed according to the game effect. In this case, the ramp control signal corresponding to the full error notification shown in FIG. 107 is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615, and at the same time, the other serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 614 are also supplied with the lamp control signal corresponding to the game effect. May be transmitted. Also, not only abnormal winning notifications and full tank error notifications, but also other error notifications (RAM clear notifications, door opening error notifications, ball runout error notifications, payout error notifications, random number circuit error notifications) (For example, when a big hit effect or a decorative symbol change display) is performed, display control of the top frame lamp, left frame lamp, right frame lamp, upper plate lamp, and lower plate lamp is performed according to the game effect. You may be made to be.

  In the example shown in FIG. 107, when performing error notification, the lamp control signal is also supplied to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 of lamps that are not subject to display control. For example, in the case of RAM clear notification, it is not necessary to perform lighting or blinking control of the upper pan lamp and the lower pan lamp, but in the example shown in FIG. 107, serial-parallel with addresses “04” and “05”. A lamp control signal in which the logical values of the corresponding bits are all 0 is also output to the conversion ICs 614 and 615. By doing so, it is possible to make sure that the LED that is not the control target at the time of error notification is turned off.

  When performing error notification, lamp control signals may not be output (transmitted) to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 of lamps that are not subject to display control. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a lamp control signal output as a serial data method in the notification control process.

  When the RAM clear notification or the door opening error notification is performed, the upper pan lamp and the lower pan lamp are not subject to display control, and as shown in FIG. 108, serials whose addresses are “04” and “05”. -Do not output the lamp control signal to the parallel conversion ICs 614, 615. Further, when the random number circuit error notification is performed, since the lower pan lamp is not a display control target, a lamp control signal is output to the serial-parallel conversion IC 615 whose address is “05” as shown in FIG. Do not. Further, when the ball break error notification or the payout error notification is performed, since the left frame lamp and the right frame lamp are not subject to display control in addition to the lower pan lamp, the address is “02” as shown in FIG. ”,“ 03 ”, and“ 05 ”are not output to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 612, 613, and 615. Further, when performing full tank error notification, only the lower pan lamp is subject to display control, and as shown in FIG. 108, serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 614 whose addresses are “00” to “04”. The lamp control signal is not output to. By doing so, it is possible to reduce lamp control signals output from the production control microcomputer 100 to the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, various types of error notification are performed using only the LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 882a to 882f, and 884a to 884f of the lamps provided on the game frame 11 side. Although cases have been described, in addition to these, various error notifications may be performed using center decoration lamps or stage lamp LEDs 125a to 125f and 126a to 126f provided on the game board 6 side.

  Next, motor control signals that are output when the movable members 151 and 152 are operated in a game effect will be described. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a motor control signal output as a serial data system in a game effect. The motor control signal shown in FIG. 109 is, for example, in the serial setting process in step S845C when variable display including a notice effect using the movable members 151 and 152 is executed in the decorative symbol changing process shown in FIG. It is set in a predetermined data storage area. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the motor control signal shown in FIG. 109 in a predetermined motor control signal storage area provided in advance in the ROM in association with, for example, display control execution data. Then, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a motor control signal from a predetermined motor control signal storage area based on the display control execution data, and outputs the motor control signal to the serial output circuit 353.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 109, each motor control signal is stored in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area with the address of the output destination serial-parallel conversion IC 616 added thereto. In this embodiment, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 that supplies a control signal to each of the motors 151a and 152a is “06”, the address “0110” is added to the 8-digit data body for controlling the motor. It is stored in the state that was done.

  When the trolley 151 is operated in the forward direction as a movable member, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000001” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal in which the logical value of the bit (first bit of the control data) corresponding to the forward operation of the motor 151a for driving the truck 151 is 1 is output, and the truck 151 is driven by driving the motor 151a. Is operated. When the operation of the truck 151 is stopped, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal whose logical value of the bit corresponding to the forward operation of the motor 151a (the first bit of the control data) is 0 is output, and the operation of the truck 151 is stopped by stopping the driving of the motor 151a. Is done. In this embodiment, when the trolley 151 is moved in the forward direction, the trolley 151 is detected by the position sensor 151b, and the driving time of the motor 151a has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Then, the driving of the motor 151a is stopped.

  When the trolley 151 is operated in the reverse direction as a movable member, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000010” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal in which the logical value of the bit (second bit of the control data) corresponding to the reverse operation of the motor 151a for driving the trolley 151 is 1 is output, and the trolley 151 is driven by driving the motor 151a. Is operated. When the operation of the truck 151 is stopped, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal having a logical value of 0 corresponding to the reverse operation of the motor 151a (the second bit of the control data) is output, and the operation of the truck 151 is stopped by stopping the driving of the motor 151a. Is done. In this embodiment, when the trolley 151 is operated in the reverse direction, the trolley 151 is no longer detected by the position sensor 151b, and the driving time of the motor 151a has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). As a result, the driving of the motor 151a is stopped.

  When the beam 152 is moved in the forward direction as a movable member, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000100” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal in which the logical value of the bit (the third bit of the control data) corresponding to the forward operation of the motor 152a for driving the beam 152 is 1 is output, and the beam is driven by driving the motor 152a. Is operated. When the operation of the beam 152 is stopped, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal having a logical value of 0 corresponding to the positive direction operation of the motor 152a (the third bit of the control data) is output, and the operation of the beam 152 is stopped by stopping the driving of the motor 152a. Is done. In this embodiment, when the beam 152 is moved in the forward direction, the beam 152 is detected by the position sensor 152b, and the driving time of the motor 152a has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). The driving of the motor 152a is stopped.

  When the beam 152 is moved in the reverse direction as a movable member, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00001000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the reverse operation of the motor 152a for driving the beam 152 (the fourth bit of the control data) is output, and the motor 152a is driven to drive the beam 152. Is operated. When the operation of the beam 152 is stopped, a motor control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 616 whose address is “06”. That is, a motor control signal having a logical value of 0 corresponding to the reverse operation of the motor 152a (the fourth bit of the control data) is output, and the operation of the beam 152 is stopped by stopping the driving of the motor 152a. Is done. In this embodiment, when the beam 152 is moved in the reverse direction, the beam 152 is not detected by the position sensor 152b, and the driving time of the motor 152a has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). As a result, the driving of the motor 152a is stopped.

  Further, in this embodiment, in steps S726 and S731A in the effect mode selection process and steps S754, S760, and S766 in the effect process at the time of operation, a lamp control signal for operating instructions to the serial-parallel conversion IC 622 and the serial-parallel conversion IC 623. Is output in the serial data format, the lamp display on the operation unit 81 is performed.

  FIG. 110A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of an operation instruction process table. The operation instruction process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the production control CPU 101 performs lamp display control of the operation unit 81 to display various operation instructions is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls each lamp of the operation unit 81 according to the data set in the operation instruction process table and displays various operation instructions. The operation instruction process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values and operation instruction lamp control execution data are collected. In the process timer set value, the duration time in the lamp display state is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the operation instruction process table, and controls the lighting / non-lighting state of each lamp in a manner set in the lamp display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The operation instruction process table shown in FIG. 110A is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The operation instruction process table is prepared according to the type of operation instruction (decision operation instruction, rotation operation instruction, selection operation instruction). Further, in this embodiment, every time the operation instruction process timer times out, the lighting of the pattern A and the lighting of the pattern B are switched and controlled to light up or blink.

  FIG. 110B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a lamp control signal output as a serial data format in the effect mode selection process and the operation effect process. As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in this embodiment, operation control lamp control execution data for two patterns (pattern A and pattern B) is used for each type of operation instruction. In this embodiment, the blinking display of the lamp is controlled by switching the operation instruction lamp control execution data of the patterns A and B. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 stores the lamp control signal shown in FIG. 110B in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area provided in advance in the ROM in association with the operation instruction lamp control execution data. ing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a lamp control signal from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area based on the operation instruction lamp control execution data, and outputs the lamp control signal to the serial output circuit 353.

  Each lamp control signal is stored in a predetermined lamp control signal storage area with the address of the output destination serial-parallel conversion ICs 622 and 623 added thereto, as shown in FIG. 110 (B). For example, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 622 that supplies the control signal to the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h is “12”, the 8-digit data main body for controlling the lamp is used. The address “00010010” is added and stored. Further, since the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 that supplies the control signal to the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l and the operation unit center lamp 82A is “13”, the lamp is controlled. Are stored with the address “00010011” added to the 8-digit data body.

  When performing the determination operation instruction display (see steps S731A and S760), first, based on the operation instruction lamp control execution data of pattern A, the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13” is transferred to the control data body. A lamp control signal with “00000001” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the red light emission input terminal of the operation unit central lamp 82A, which is a multi-color LED, is output. A character string such as “!” Is lit. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13” based on the lamp control execution data for pattern B operation instruction. The That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the operation unit central lamp 82A is turned off. When the determination operation instruction display is performed by repeatedly performing such control, control is performed such that a character string such as “Press!” In red is blinked at predetermined time intervals in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81. Done.

  When the rotation operation instruction display is performed (see steps S726 and S754), first, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000010” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13”. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the blue light emission input terminal of the operation unit central lamp 82A, which is a multi-color LED, is output. A character string such as “!” Is lit. Further, when the rotation operation instruction display is performed, the lamp control signal having the same content is output when the operation instruction lamp control execution data is pattern A and pattern B. In 811, a character string such as “Turn it !!” in blue is continuously lit.

  When performing the selection operation instruction display (see step S766), first, based on the operation instruction lamp control execution data of the pattern A, the control data body is displayed in the serial-parallel conversion IC 622 whose address is “12”. A lamp control signal “00001111” is transmitted. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the first pressing operation unit lamp 82 a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82 d is output, and the first pressing operation unit lamp in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 is output. The lamps 82a to 82d are turned on. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 622 whose address is “12” based on the lamp control execution data for pattern B operation instruction. The That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d are turned off. When the selection operation instruction display is performed by repeatedly performing such control, the first operation button lamp 82a to the fourth operation button lamp 82d are blinked at predetermined time intervals in the operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81. Such control is performed.

  Next, the serial setting process will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the serial setting process. In the serial setting process, for example, when decorative display of a decorative design is performed in the effect control process process (see steps S835C and 845C) or various error notifications are performed (steps S1970, S1976, S1983, S1990, S1998, S2003, S2008). ) Is executed.

  In the serial setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads out lamp control execution data (such as lamp lighting pattern data accompanying the variation pattern, motor control data (step S835C only), etc.) from the ROM (step S950). In this case, the effect control CPU 101 reads the lamp control execution data in the process table shown in FIG. 89, for example, when performing the serial setting process during the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols. When serial setting processing is performed in the notification control process, error lamp control execution data in the error notification process table shown in FIG. 106 is read.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is a change in the display state of each lamp based on the read lamp control execution data (step S951). If the display state of each lamp is changed, the CPU 101 for effect control extracts the lamp control signal to which the address of the serial-parallel conversion IC of the lamp to be displayed is added from a predetermined lamp control signal storage area ( Step S952). Next, header data (1FFh), a mark bit, and an end bit shown in FIG. 28 are added to the extracted ramp control signal and set in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM (step S953). Then, a lamp control signal output request flag is set (step S954).

  For example, when the serial setting process is executed in steps S907, S922, and S929 in the notification control process, one of the addressed lamp control signals shown in FIG. 107 is read in step S952, and the data is read in step S953. It will be set in the storage area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads display control execution data from the ROM (step S955). In this case, for example, when performing serial setting processing during execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the effect control CPU 101 reads display control execution data of the process table shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the serial setting process is performed in the notification control process, the error notification process table shown in FIG. 106 does not include the display control execution data. become.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not any of the movable members 151 and 152 is included in the game effect based on the read display control execution data (step S956). When the movable members 151 and 152 are movable, the effect control CPU 101 adds a motor control signal to which the address (“06” in this example) of the serial-parallel conversion IC of the movable members 151 and 152 to be moved is added. Are extracted from a predetermined motor control signal storage area (step S957). Next, header data (1FFh), a mark bit, and an end bit shown in FIG. 28 are added to the extracted motor control signal and set in a predetermined data storage area provided in the RAM (step S958). Then, a motor control signal output request flag is set (step S959).

  For example, when the decorative display variable display includes a notice effect or the like, and any of the movable members 151 and 152 is moved, when the serial setting process is executed in steps S835C and S845C, the diagram is displayed in step S952. One of the motor control signals with an address shown in 109 is read out and set in the data storage area in step S953.

  FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a data storage area in which a lamp control signal and a motor control signal to be output are set. In this example, nine data storage areas for storing lamp control signals or motor control signals are prepared, and are output in the order in which they are output to the panel side IC substrate 601 and the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B. The lamp control signal and the motor control signal are sequentially stored in step S953.

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of the serial input / output process (step S708). In the serial input / output process, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is set (step S970). If set, the lamp control signal output request flag or the motor control signal output request flag is reset (step S971), and the lamp control signal and the motor control signal stored in the data storage area are transferred to the serial output circuit 353. Output (step S972). In this case, when a plurality of lamp control signals are set in the data storage area, the effect control CPU 101 sequentially reads each lamp control signal and outputs it to the serial output circuit 353 in step S972. The output lamp control signal and motor control signal are converted into serial data by the serial output circuit 353, and the board side IC board 601 and the frame side IC boards 602, 603, and 604 are connected via the relay boards 606 and 607. , 605A and 605B are output as a serial data system.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 causes the input capture signal output unit 357 to output an input capture signal (latch signal) to the board side IC substrate 601 via the relay substrates 606 and 607 (step S973). The input IC 621 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 latches the detection signals of the position sensors 151b and 152b based on the input input signal being input, and passes through the relay boards 606 and 607 as a serial data system. And output to the effect control board 80. Then, the effect control CPU 101 reads the input data from the serial input circuit 354 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM (step S974). In step S974, the effect control CPU 101 controls the serial input circuit 354 to read the input data from the serial input circuit 354 after delaying the time by which the serial input circuit 354 receives the input data from the input IC 621.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 causes the input capture signal output unit 357 to output an input capture signal (latch signal) to the frame side IC substrate 605 via the relay substrate 607 (step S975). The input IC 620 mounted on the frame side IC board 605A latches the detection signals of the operation buttons 81a to 81e based on the input input signal being input, and produces the serial data system via the relay board 607. The data is output to the control board 80. Then, the effect control CPU 101 reads the input data from the serial input circuit 354 and stores it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM (step S976). In step S976, the effect control CPU 101 controls the serial input circuit 354 to read the input data from the serial input circuit 354 after delaying by the time for which the serial input circuit 354 receives the input data from the input IC 620.

  114 and 115 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of display effects on the variable display device 9, sound effects by the speaker 27, and display effects by each lamp. FIG. 114 (A) shows an example when the decorative display is variably displayed on the variable display device 9.

  FIG. 114 (B) shows an example in which initialization notification is performed in the variable display device 9. As shown in FIG. 114 (B), when the initialization designation command is received and initialization notification is performed in the variable display device 9, a predetermined period (for example, 31 seconds) after the initialization designation command is received, The LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, and 283a to 283f of all the lamps (excluding the dish lamp) provided in the game frame 11 are turned on, and a predetermined error sound is output from the speaker 27, and the RAM is cleared. Inform you.

  FIG. 114 (C) shows an example in which an abnormal winning notification is performed in the variable display device 9 and an abnormal notification display (for example, blinking display) is performed by the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface of the upper plate lamp. It is shown. When receiving the abnormal prize notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to display the abnormality notification on the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface of the upper plate lamp. Further, even if the decorative pattern variable display is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the abnormality notification display of the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface side of the upper plate lamp is continued. Further, even when the variable display of the decorative symbols is finished, the abnormality notification display of the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface side of the upper plate lamp is continued.

  Since the production control microcomputer 100 does not execute the control for stopping the abnormality notification display, the abnormality notification display of the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface of the upper plate lamp is performed until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. continue. However, the production control microcomputer 100 may control the abnormality notification display to stop when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the abnormality notification display is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 does not detect an abnormal prize and does not detect an abnormal prize for a predetermined period after the power supply to the game machine is started (a period during which the initialization notification is executed). The abnormal winning notification designating command is not transmitted from the microcomputer 560. However, the game control microcomputer 560 always detects an abnormal winning when the value of the special symbol process flag is less than a predetermined value (5 in this embodiment), so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the game control. If an abnormal winning notification designation command is received during a predetermined period after the power supply to the machine is started, the abnormal winning notification may not be performed.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 detects that one game ball has won a big winning opening when it is not in the big win game state, the abnormal control notification designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer. When it is detected that a predetermined number (a plurality (for example, 5)) of game balls have been won in the big winning opening when it is not in the big hit gaming state, control is performed so as to send an abnormal winning notification designation command. Also good. Further, when it is not in the big hit gaming state, when it is detected that a predetermined number (a plurality of) gaming balls have won within a predetermined time, an abnormal winning notification designating command may be transmitted. In addition, when receiving the abnormal prize notification designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 performs the abnormality notification display as described above.

  FIG. 115 shows an example in which a full tank error notification is displayed (for example, blinking) by the LEDs 84a to 84f of the lower pan lamps. When the full control error is detected based on the full error notification designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 performs control to display full error notifications on the LEDs 84a to 84f of the lower pan lamps.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, since the surge absorber 1100 is arranged on the ground substrate 1000 on the wiring 1002 from the connector CN2 on the gaming machine main body side, charging of the gaming ball in the gaming machine is possible. By gradually discharging the surge voltage based on (static electricity), the surge voltage can be absorbed. Further, it is possible to prevent the surge voltage from flowing into the gaming machine side by discharging the surge voltage based on leakage from the card unit 50 side, static electricity noise, etc. by the surge absorber 1100.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since the card unit 50 is grounded by the route of the wiring 2002 different from the route of the wirings 2003 and 2001, the card unit 50 and the ground substrate 1000 are not connected by the wiring 2003. The card unit 50 can be grounded even in the case (including the case where the wiring 2003 is disconnected). Further, even when the ground board 1000 and the outside of the gaming machine are not connected by the wiring 2001 (including the case where the wiring 2001 is disconnected), the card unit 50 can be grounded, and the gaming machine body can also be connected to the wiring 2004, 2003. , 2002 can be grounded.

  In this embodiment, when the operation start voltage of the surge absorber 1100 is higher than the voltage used in the gaming machine and lower than the voltage used in the card unit 50, the leakage from the card unit 50 side Thus, it is possible to prevent the surge voltage due to the above from flowing into the gaming machine side.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since the portion other than the formation portion of the notch recess 38a in the front side plate 38b of the ball tank 38 is disposed in front of the rear surface of the speaker unit 27a disposed on the left and right, the speaker Even when 27 is enlarged and the front and rear width of the speaker unit 27a becomes long and may interfere with the side of the ball tank 38, the amount of stored balls is not reduced and the back side of the front frame 2a Thus, the ball tank 38 can be arranged without overhanging, and interference with various devices provided in the gaming machine installation island (not shown) can be avoided. Further, the outer surface of the notch recess 38a of the ball tank 38 does not directly contact the outer surface of the main body of the speaker unit 27a protruding to the back side of the front frame 2a, but the vertical surface 122 that directly contacts the outer surface of the main body of the speaker unit 27a. In addition, since the contact is made indirectly through the main body plate (ball tank mounting portion 720) of the mechanism plate 105 that is in contact with the vertical surface 122, the vibration generated when the speaker 27 outputs sound is affected by the ball tank. Since the game balls stored in the ball tank 38 are leveled and stored without unevenness due to this vibration, the occurrence of ball clogging or the like can be effectively prevented.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the pressing operation unit 811 that can be pressed by the player and the rotation operation unit 812 that can be rotated by the player are provided. Therefore, by providing a plurality of operation means, it is possible to further improve the game playability. In addition, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied, a display member 811A is provided that displays in a visible manner that either the pressing operation unit 811 or the rotation operation unit 812 should be operated by light from the operation unit central lamp 82A. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player which operation means is used. Therefore, even when a plurality of operation means are provided, the player can easily recognize which operation means should be operated, and the gaming machine in which the operation by the operation means is smoothly advanced. be able to.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the rotation operation unit 812 is arranged in a shape surrounding the periphery of the pressing operation unit 811, whereby the pressing operation unit 811 and the rotation operation unit 812 are integrally configured. . Therefore, a plurality of operation means can be installed without taking up more space than necessary.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the display member 811A is provided inside the pressing operation portion 811. Therefore, as long as the display of the pressing operation unit 811 is confirmed, the player can easily recognize which operation means should be operated.

  Further, according to this embodiment, a character string such as “Press!” Indicating that the pressing operation unit 811 should be operated is displayed on the display member by causing the operation unit center lamp (multi-color LED) 82A to emit red light. 811A is displayed so as to be visible. Further, by causing the operation unit center lamp 82A to emit light in blue, a character string such as “Turn!” Indicating that the rotation operation unit 812 should be operated is displayed on the display member 811A so as to be visible. Therefore, which operation means should be operated can be recognized by a character string, and the player can easily recognize which operation means should be operated.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the LED 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f of the upper plate lamp are provided on the outer side surface of the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, and the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 according to the game state. The light emission state of the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f of the upper plate lamps provided in is controlled. Therefore, by causing the LED 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f of the upper lamp provided on the outer side surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 to emit light, it is possible to diversify the production mode in the game effect, and to the player The production effect can be improved. In addition, since the upper plate lamp LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f are provided on the outer side surface of the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3, for example, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in one section of the game store. Even if the player is a player other than the player who is playing with the gaming machine (a player who is playing a game with the adjacent gaming machine or a player who is not yet playing a game in the game store) The light emission state of the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f of the upper lamp of the gaming machine can be made visible. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that draws attention to a person other than the player who is playing the game on the gaming machine, thereby providing an effect.

  In this embodiment, the case where the notification is performed by blinking the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface side of the upper plate lamp is shown. However, the notification mode is limited to that shown in this embodiment. Absent. For example, when a multi-color LED is used as the LED of the upper plate lamp, the notification may be made by causing the multi-color LED to emit light with a color different from that of a normal effect. Further, for example, the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface of the back plate lamp may be blinked at a blinking speed different from the blinking speed of the LED in a normal performance. In addition, such a notification mode is not limited to an abnormal winning notification, but a full tank error notification and other error notifications (RAM clear notification, door opening error notification, ball break error notification, payout error notification, random circuit error notification, etc. ).

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 executes abnormality notification when a predetermined abnormal state (for example, abnormal winning state) is detected. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 performs abnormality notification by controlling the light emission state of the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f of the upper plate lamp provided on the outer side surface of the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. Therefore, by using the LED lamps 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the outer side surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, abnormality notification can be performed in a manner that is not easily noticed by an unauthorized person. In addition, since the game store clerk in the game store can see the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the outer side of the batting supply tray (upper plate) 3, the abnormal state such as various errors and frauds can be easily made to the game store clerk. Can be recognized. Further, since the abnormality notification can be performed by using the LED 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f of the upper lamp of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 used for normal game production, it is necessary to provide a special device for performing the abnormality notification. The cost for performing abnormality notification can be prevented.

  FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the gaming store. As shown in FIG. 116, each gaming machine is installed side by side on the gaming machine installation island 500 in the gaming store. Note that FIG. 116 corresponds to a view of the inside of the game store viewed from a passage on the side orthogonal to each gaming machine installation island 500.

  In general, a fraudster performs an operation such as creating a winning state of a game ball illegally while sitting in front of a gaming machine and playing a game, but when viewed from a fraudster sitting in front of a gaming machine, Only the front side of the plane is visible. Therefore, when viewed from the fraudster, as shown in FIG. 116, the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f provided on the side surface among the upper plate lamps provided on the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 of the gaming machine are Hard to see. Therefore, when an abnormal winning is detected, the abnormal notification is performed in such a manner that it is difficult for an unauthorized person to notice the abnormal winning notification by using only the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side of the upper plate lamp. Can be performed.

  In addition, game shop staff and the like usually look around the inside of a game shop from a passage orthogonal to each gaming machine installation island 500 from the viewpoint shown in FIG. Therefore, when viewed from a game store clerk or the like, as shown in FIG. 116, the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface of the upper plate lamp provided on the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 of the gaming machine are clearly visible. Therefore, when an abnormal winning is detected, an abnormal winning such as an abnormal winning is easily notified to the game store clerk by notifying only the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side of the upper plate lamp. Can be recognized.

  For example, some conventional gaming machines are configured to perform a game effect or an error notification using a lamp provided on the upper part of the gaming frame of the gaming machine (see, for example, JP-A-2001-96042). With such a configuration, an abnormal winning notification can be made using a lamp provided on the upper part of the game frame that is difficult for a player to see, so that it is difficult for a fraudster (actor sitting in front of a gaming machine) to be recognized to some extent. Abnormality notification can be performed in a manner. However, since the game clerk often overlooks the inside of the game store from the passage on the side orthogonal to each gaming machine installation island 500, the lamp provided at the upper part of the game frame is difficult to see even from the game store clerk. An abnormal state such as an abnormal prize cannot be easily recognized by a game store clerk.

  In addition, for example, in a conventional gaming machine, an ultrasonic signal is transmitted when the gaming machine detects an error, and is received by an ultrasonic receiver provided in the gaming store to recognize the error (for example, JP 2005-261647). With such a configuration, when an abnormal winning is detected, only an amusement store clerk can recognize the occurrence of an error such as an abnormal winning without being noticed by an unauthorized person. However, it is necessary to equip a gaming machine with an ultrasonic generator, and an amusement store with an ultrasonic receiver, which is expensive for abnormality notification.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the abnormal winning notification is performed using the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, 882f on the side surface of the upper plate lamp provided on the side surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Thus, it is possible to make it possible for only a game shop clerk to recognize the occurrence of an error such as an abnormal winning prize without incurring a special cost for notifying an abnormality and without being noticed by an unauthorized person.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, in addition to when an abnormal winning is detected, each of the LEDs 882a to 882f of the upper plate lamp is lit or blinked when a random number circuit error, a ball running out error, or a payout error is detected. By checking the lighting or blinking state of the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface side of the upper plate lamp, a game clerk can easily recognize the occurrence of the error. In addition, since each of the LEDs 882a to 882f of the upper plate lamp is lit when the fanfare effect is executed, the game store clerk or the like can check the lighting state of the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the side surface of the upper plate lamp. The gaming state of each gaming machine can be easily recognized.

  Note that the lighting or blinking control of the upper plate lamp in the game effect and the lighting or blinking control of the upper plate lamp at the time of each error notification are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may control the lighting or blinking state of the LEDs 882a to 882f of the upper plate lamp depending on whether or not the gaming state is a certain change state. Further, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lighting or blinking state of each LED 882a to 882f of the upper plate lamp according to the game effect (for example, the effect during the round, the interval effect, the ending effect) during the big hit. May be.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred based on the input of the detection signal from the count switch 23 in a game state other than the big hit game state. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes an abnormal winning notification based on the determination that an abnormal winning has occurred. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes abnormal winning notification by controlling the light emission state of the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f of the upper plate lamps provided on the outer side surface of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. . Therefore, it is possible to make the game store clerk recognize an illegal act in which a prize ball is paid out by winning a game ball at a big prize opening of a bag that is not originally open in a game state other than the big hit game state.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, the game control microcomputer 560 prohibits execution of control for paying out game balls by prohibiting transmission of a prize ball number command. To do. For this reason, when there is a possibility that a detection signal is input from the count switch 23 due to a fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent the player from paying out a prize ball based on a winning, and a situation where a fraudulent person is profited by the fraudulent act. Can be prevented.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port switch 14a is input, and when the second start port 14 is in the closed state. Based on the input of the start detection signal from the second start port switch 14a, it is determined that an abnormal start winning has occurred. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the abnormal start winning notification based on the determination that the abnormal start winning has occurred. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the abnormal start winning notification by controlling the light emission state of the LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f of the upper plate lamp provided on the outer side surface of the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. To do. Therefore, the game store clerk can be made aware of an illegal act of paying out a prize ball by winning a game medium in the second starting port 14 of the bag that is not originally open.

  In this embodiment, the case where the abnormal winning notification is performed in the same notification mode in the case where the abnormal winning in the big winning opening is detected and in the case where the abnormal winning in the second start winning opening 14a is detected has been described. The abnormal winning notification may be performed in different notification modes. For example, on the outer side surface of the hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 with different lighting or blinking patterns depending on whether an abnormal winning at the big winning opening is detected or an abnormal winning at the second starting winning opening 14a is detected. The upper plate lamp LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f provided may be turned on or blinked.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is a full tank state in which a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4. A command (full tank error designation command) indicating that the surplus ball tray (bottom plate) 4 is in a full tank state is included. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the command indicating that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is full from the game control microcomputer 560, so that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) ) By controlling the light emission state of the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower pan lamps provided at 4, control for informing the full tank state of the surplus ball receiving pan (lower pan) 4 is executed. Accordingly, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the light emission states of the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower dish lamps provided in the surplus ball receiving tray (lower dish) 4 separately from the game production effect devices such as the variable display device 9 and the speaker 27. A full tank condition is notified by controlling. Therefore, the full tank state can be notified without interruption during the game effect (for example, the effect during the big hit). Moreover, since the production control microcomputer 100 controls the light emission state of the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower tray lamps provided in the surplus ball tray (lower tray) 4, the processing load of the game control microcomputer 560 is reduced. Can do. Further, since the full tank error notification can be performed by using the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower tray lamps of the surplus ball tray (lower tray) 4 used for normal game effects, it is not necessary to provide a special device for performing the full tank error notification. Further, it is possible to prevent an increase in cost for performing full tank error notification.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 uses the LED 125a-125f, 126a-126f, 281a-281l, 282a- Control signals for controlling 282f, 283a to 283f, 882a to 882f, and 884a to 884f are output in a serial signal system. The serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 618 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B are one system. In addition to being connected through wiring, different address information is assigned in advance, and only the control signal with its own address information added is converted into a parallel signal system and output. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a control signal for controlling the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 618 provided in the game board 6, address information that can identify the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 618 is provided. The added control signal is output by the serial signal system. In addition, when the production control microcomputer 100 outputs a control signal for controlling the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 provided in the game frame 11, address information that can identify the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 is provided. The added control signal is output by the serial signal system. Therefore, the number of wirings between the game board 6 and the game frame 11 can be reduced. Therefore, in a gaming machine in which the game frame 11 and the game board 6 are configured to be detachable, it is possible to easily attach and detach the game frame 11 and the game board 6.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 618 mounted on the board-side IC board 601 and the serial-parallel mounted on each frame-side IC board 602 to 604 by the relay boards 606 and 607. The connection with the conversion ICs 610 to 615 is relayed. The relay board 607 relays the connection between the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC boards 602 to 604 and the effect control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the detachment work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be easily performed only by performing the connection work and the removal work to the relay boards 606 and 607.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the frame side IC substrate 602 as a collective substrate on which the two serial-parallel conversions 610 and 611 are mounted is provided on the game frame 11 side. Further, a board side IC substrate 601 as a collective board on which four serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 618 are mounted is provided on the game board 6 side. Therefore, the boards on which the serial-parallel conversion ICs are mounted can be integrated, and the number of parts in the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the lower tray lamps 884 a to 884 f provided on the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 are provided on the peripheral portion of the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4. Therefore, by making the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower tray lamps provided in such a manner as to surround the surplus ball tray (lower tray) 4, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize a notification state such as a full tank notification. .

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is provided in a gaming machine including LEDs 884a to 884f of lower tray lamps provided in the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 according to the gaming state. The light emission state of the LED of each lamp is controlled. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 has a surplus sphere tray in a light emission mode different from that when the light emission state of the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower tray lamps provided in the surplus sphere tray (lower tray) 4 is controlled during the game. (Lower pan) 4 A full tank notification is executed by controlling the light emission state of the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower pan lamps provided in the peripheral portion of the lower pan. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to provide a special light emitter only for notifying the full tank state, and the cost for full tank notification can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B. To 615 are connected to each other through one line of wiring using a connector. Therefore, the wiring work between the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be performed simply by attaching and detaching the connector, and the game frame 11 and the game board 6 can be attached and detached more easily.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the serial signal system using the serial output circuit 78. Therefore, the number of wires between the game control microcomputer 560 and the effect control microcomputer 100 can also be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 and the frame-side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605A, and 605B mounted on the board-side IC substrate 601. A clock signal used in common for the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 and the input ICs 620 and 621 is output. Therefore, serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601, serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615 mounted on the frame side IC substrates 602, 603, 604, 605 A, and 605 B, and input ICs 620 and 621, Can be easily synchronized, and the number of wiring lines for clock signals can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 may store the device ID of the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619 as an address in a predetermined address storage area of the RAM in advance. If constituted in this way, ID information peculiar to serial-parallel conversion IC610-619 is used as address information, and each lamp 125a-125f, 126a-126f, 281a-281l, 282a-282f, 283a-283f, 882a- 882f, 884a to 884f can be controlled.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the initialization notification is given priority over the abnormality notification, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization notification is difficult to recognize. That is, the initialization notification is performed prominently. The game control microcomputer 560 transmits an initialization designation command when a user reset that causes the program to start executing from the top address (for example, address 0000) occurs even when power supply to the game machine is started. As a cause of the occurrence of the user reset, for example, in the case where the watchdog timer is configured to be used, there is a case where the watchdog timer has timed out due to an illegal act that prevents the smooth progress of the program. Such fraudulent acts are configured to be controlled in a probabilistic state, particularly when a predetermined jackpot symbol (predetermined probability variation jackpot symbol or sudden probability variation jackpot symbol) is determined based on a random number for determining the jackpot symbol. It is likely to occur when it is. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is initialized, and a counter for generating a jackpot symbol determining random number is initialized, and it is easy to receive an illegal act that makes it easy to grasp the count value of the counter. By making the initialization notice conspicuous as in this embodiment, it is possible to easily grasp from the outside of the gaming machine that the gaming control microcomputer 560 has been initialized. Is easily recognized.

  In this embodiment, the production control board 80, the board side IC board 601, the frame side IC boards 602, 603, 604, 605A, 605B and the relay boards 606, 607 are connected as the production control board 80, The relay board 606 and the relay board 607 are connected to the bus type by one system wiring route, and the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 619 mounted on the board side IC board 601 and the frame side IC boards 602 to 604 are one bus type. Although the case where it is connected by the wiring route of the system has been described, the serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619 mounted on the board side IC substrate 601 are connected in series (hereinafter also referred to as daisy chain type connection), and each frame Serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 613 mounted on the side IC boards 602 to 604 are connected in series (daisy chain type). By connecting) may reduce the number of wires.

  Further, as the LED of the lamp provided in the game frame 11 or the game board 6, an LED that performs gradation control (for example, a multi-color LED) may be used so that the brightness can be controlled.

  In addition, when controlling the brightness using the LED of the lamp that performs gradation control, a serial-parallel conversion IC that outputs a control signal to the LED of the lamp that adjusts the brightness, and a control signal to the LED of the lamp that does not adjust the brightness You may make it differ from the serial-parallel conversion IC to output.

  In the above embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 ends the initialization notification when a predetermined period has elapsed (see steps S901 to S905), but ends the initialization notification at another timing. May be. For example, the initialization notification is ended when the decorative symbol variable display is started for the first time after the initialization notification is started, or the abnormal winning notification designation command is received before the decorative symbol variable display is started. Sometimes the initialization notification may be terminated. Alternatively, the initialization notification may be terminated when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received or when the first effect control command other than the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received after the initialization notification is started. That is, it is preferable that the initialization notification is continued only for a period sufficient for the game store clerk or the like to recognize the initialization notification.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control means receives the variation pattern command, but when the display result specifying command cannot be received, the variation pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit. If it is determined that a change pattern command other than the change pattern command that can be used for both the normal big hit and the probable big hit is received is determined. Since the stop symbol is determined to be a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the received variation pattern, even if the display result specifying command cannot be received due to noise or the like, the variable display device 9 can notify that a big hit will occur. Furthermore, immediately after receiving the variation pattern command, when it is determined that an effect control command other than the display result specifying command has been received, the above control based on the received variation pattern command may be performed. In other words, the effect control means determines that the regular command has not been received (for example, the display result specifying command cannot be received) or determines that the non-normal command has been received (for example, the display result subsequent to the variation pattern command). When an effect control command other than the specific command is received), it is preferable to execute effect control (for example, determine a stop symbol of a decorative symbol) based on the received regular command. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged due to non-reception of a regular command or reception of a non-regular command.

  The same control may be performed for other effect control commands. For example, when a jackpot start designation command that can identify the start of a specific gaming state is received, if it does not match the display result identification command that has already been received (for example, a display result 2 designation command indicating a normal jackpot is a display result identification When it is stored in the command storage area, when the jackpot start 3 designation command indicating the probability variation jackpot is received, the production control based on the jackpot start designation command (for example, the effect device notifies the probability variation jackpot) ) Or when a jackpot end designation command that can identify the end of a specific gaming state is received, if it does not match the jackpot start designation command that has already been received (for example, a jackpot start 1 designation command indicating a normal jackpot) After receiving a jackpot end designation 2 command indicating a probabilistic jackpot) Effect control (e.g., the background of the variable display device 9 on the background corresponding to the probability variation state) based on the de to run. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control of the effect control means from being confused as much as possible with the control of the game control means.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lamp control signals with addresses are output to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 618, whereby the LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283a to each lamp. The case of controlling 283f, 882a to 882f, 884a to 884f has been described, but a plurality of serial-parallel conversion ICs are connected in series with the same system wiring, and all lamps connected with the same system wiring are controlled. Data of a fixed length including a lamp control signal for doing so may be output.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
FIG. 117 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the effect processing at the time of operation. 117 is different from the operation time effect process of FIG. 91 in that steps S759a and S761a to S763a are provided instead of steps S759 and S760 to S762.

  When it is determined in step S758 that it is a period for requesting a pressing operation, it is determined whether or not the above-described determination operation detection flag is set (step S759a). When it is determined that the determination operation detection flag is set, the variable display device 9 is controlled according to the determination operation (step S761a). Specifically, in step S761, in the chance display as shown in (g) of FIG. 34, the value of the power displayed in the bar graph format increases in accordance with the increase in the number of pressing operations by the determination operation of the pressing operation unit 811. Display. Then, in response to the determination operation of the pressing operation unit 811 being performed, serial setting is performed to cause the LEDs corresponding to the determination operation (for example, the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a to the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d) to emit light. Processing is executed (step S762a). Then, the determination operation detection flag is reset (step S763a), and the process ends.

  When the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 811 is performed in the period in which the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 811 is requested by such an effect process at the time of operation, the first press detector 81a to the fourth press detector 81d. Only when a pressing operation is detected by any of the plurality of pressing detectors, it is determined that the pressing operation is effective.

  In this embodiment, when the determination operation is displayed as an instruction, a character string such as “Press!” Is displayed in red on the pressing operation unit 811. When the rotation operation is displayed as an instruction, blue is displayed on the pressing operation unit 811. In the above example, a character string such as “Turn it! For example, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), when the determination operation is displayed as an instruction, the pressing operation unit 811 blinks (may be lit), and when the rotation operation is displayed as an instruction, As shown in b) and (c), the lamps on the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 811 may be rotated. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 118 (d), the operation unit 81 includes first to eighth pressing operation unit lamps 82 h to 82 h that are monochromatic LEDs on the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 811. In addition, an operation unit center lamp 82 </ b> A that is a monochromatic LED is provided in the center of the pressing operation unit 811. In this case, when the determination operation is instructed to display, control is performed so that the pressing operation unit 811 blinks (may be lit) as shown in FIG. 118A by causing the operation unit central lamp 82A to emit light. To do. In the case of displaying the rotation operation, for example, the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a, the eighth pressing operation unit lamp 82h, the fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d, the seventh pressing operation unit lamp 82g, the third pressing operation, for example. As shown in FIGS. 118 (b) and 118 (c), the lamps are turned on in the order of the part lamp 82c, the sixth pressing operation part lamp 82f, the second pressing operation part lamp 82b, and the fifth pressing operation part lamp 82e. Control is performed so that the lamp on the outer peripheral portion of the pressing operation unit 811 is rotated and displayed in the clockwise direction. In addition, you may control so that the lamp | ramp of the outer peripheral part of the press operation part 811 may be rotated and displayed counterclockwise.

  FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the lamp control signal output as a serial data format in the effect mode selection process and the operation effect process. In the example shown in FIG. 119, when the determination operation instruction display is performed (see steps S731A and S760), first, the serial-parallel whose address is “13” based on the pattern A operation instruction lamp control execution data. A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000001” is transmitted to the conversion IC 623. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the operation unit central lamp 82A which is a single color LED is output, and the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 is turned on. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13” based on the lamp control execution data for pattern B operation instruction. The That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the operation unit central lamp 82A is turned off. When the determination operation instruction display is performed by repeating such control, as shown in FIG. 118A, control is performed such that the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 blinks at predetermined time intervals. .

  When the rotation operation instruction display is performed (see steps S726 and S754), the first pressing operation unit lamp 82a and the eighth pressing operation unit are performed according to the operation instruction lamp control execution data from pattern 1 to pattern 8 shown in FIG. A lamp 82h, a fourth pressing operation unit lamp 82d, a seventh pressing operation unit lamp 82g, a third pressing operation unit lamp 82c, a sixth pressing operation unit lamp 82f, a second pressing operation unit lamp 82b, and a fifth pressing operation unit lamp 82e. A lamp control signal whose logical value of the corresponding bits is 1 is output, and as shown in FIGS. 118B and 118C, the lamp on the outer peripheral portion of the pressing operation portion 811 is rotated and displayed in the clockwise direction. .

  Note that the lamp control signal and the output mode of the lamp control signal when the selection operation instruction display is performed (see step S766) are the same as the control contents described with reference to FIG.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the display member 811A in which character strings are printed with different paints for the determination operation instruction and the rotation operation instruction is shown, but the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 is determined. A display member may be provided separately for the operation instruction and the rotation operation instruction. FIG. 120C is a cross-sectional view showing another example of the structure of the operation unit 81. As shown in FIG. 120C, the operation unit 81 includes a display member 811B for determining operation display and a display member 811C for instructing rotation operation. Each of the display members 811B and C is a resin-made translucent member, and is formed into a sheet having a constant thickness and a circular shape slightly smaller than the inner peripheral size of the pressing operation portion 811. Further, the display member 811B has a character string such as “push!” Engraved on the upper surface of a plate formed of a resin member such as an acrylic material. The display member 811C has a character string such as “Turn it!” Engraved on the upper surface of a plate formed of a resin member such as an acrylic material. In addition, not only a character string but a figure, a pattern, etc. may be engraved on the display members 811B and 811C, for example.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 120 (c), a red (or colorless) single color LED 82B is provided on the side of the display member 811B. In addition, a blue (or colorless) single color LED 82C is provided on the side of the display member 811B. In the example shown in FIG. 120, when the instruction for the determination operation is displayed, the red single color LED 82B blinks (may be turned on), thereby pressing the operation unit 81 as shown in FIG. In 811, control is performed to display a character string such as “Press!” In red. In addition, when the rotation operation instruction display is performed, the blue single-color LED 82C is turned on (may be blinking), so that, as shown in FIG. It is controlled to display a character string such as “Turn it!”.

  FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of addresses assigned to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615, 622, and 623. In the example shown in FIG. 121, the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is 13 converts serial data into parallel data, and the red LED 82B provided in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 and the pressing operation of the operation unit 81 The blue LED 82C provided in the unit 811 and the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l (four LEDs in this example) provided in the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 are supplied. When a signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 to the red LED 82B, a character string such as “Press!” Is displayed in red in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 as shown in FIG. To be controlled. When a signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 to the blue LED 82C, a character string such as “Turn !!” is displayed in blue in the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 as shown in FIG. 120 (b). To be controlled.

  Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 122 (a), when the determination operation is instructed and displayed, the pressing operation unit 811 is caused to blink (may be lit), and when the rotation operation is instructed and displayed, As shown in 122 (b), the rotation operation unit 812 may be lit (may be blinking). In this case, the operation unit center lamp 82A need not be a multi-color LED, but may be a single-color LED.

  Note that the example shown in FIG. 122 (b) shows a case where the rotation operation unit 812 is turned on (may be blinking). In this case, the rotation operation unit 812 cannot be turned on or blinked. Therefore, you may make it further provide the light emission part for the rotation operation part 812 formed with the member made from a translucent resin on the outer side of the rotation operation part 812. FIG. Then, the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l are arranged in the light emitting unit for the rotation operation unit 812 provided outside the rotation operation unit 812, and the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to The player may be urged to operate the rotation operation unit 812 by lighting the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l to light (or blink) the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 812. .

  FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of addresses given to the serial-parallel conversion ICs 611 to 615, 622, and 623. In the example shown in FIG. 123, the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is 13 converts serial data into parallel data, and is provided in the operation unit center lamp 82 </ b> A that is a single color LED and the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81. The first rotation operation section lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation section lamp 82l (four LEDs in this example) are supplied. When a signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 to the operation unit center lamp 82A, the pressing operation unit 811 is controlled to blink (may be lit) as shown in FIG. 122 (a). When a signal is supplied from the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 to the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l, as shown in FIG. 122B, the rotation operation unit 812 is turned on (may be blinking). ) Controlled to display.

  FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of a lamp control signal output as a serial data format in the effect mode selection process and the operation effect process. In the example shown in FIG. 124, when the determination operation instruction display is performed (see steps S731A and S760), first, the serial-parallel address is “13” based on the pattern A operation instruction lamp control execution data. A lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000001” is transmitted to the conversion IC 623. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the operation unit central lamp 82A which is a single color LED is output, and the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 is turned on. At the time of process data switching, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00000000” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13” based on the lamp control execution data for pattern B operation instruction. The That is, a lamp control signal in which the logical values of the bits corresponding to the LEDs of each lamp are all 0 is output, and the operation unit central lamp 82A is turned off. When the determination operation instruction display is performed by repeatedly performing such control, as shown in FIG. 122 (a), control is performed such that the pressing operation unit 811 of the operation unit 81 blinks at predetermined time intervals. .

  When the rotation operation instruction display is performed (see steps S726 and S754), first, a lamp control signal whose control data body is “00111100” is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion IC 623 whose address is “13”. That is, a lamp control signal having a logical value of 1 corresponding to the first rotation operation unit lamp 82i to the fourth rotation operation unit lamp 82l is output, and the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 is turned on. Further, when the rotation operation instruction display is performed, the same lamp control signal is output when the operation instruction lamp control execution data is pattern A and pattern B, and the result is shown in FIG. 122 (b). As described above, the rotation operation unit 812 of the operation unit 81 is continuously turned on.

  Note that the lamp control signal and the output mode of the lamp control signal when the selection operation instruction display is performed (see step S766) are the same as the control contents described with reference to FIG.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine of each of the above embodiments can be given a predetermined game value to a player mainly when the special symbol that is variably displayed on the variable display unit based on the start winning prize becomes the predetermined symbol. A pachinko machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a prize in a predetermined area of an electric game that is released based on a start prize, or a start prize The present invention is applied even to a pachinko game machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when there is a prize for a predetermined electric combination that is released when the stop symbol of the symbol variably displayed becomes a predetermined symbol combination. it can. Furthermore, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine that inserts game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game, or a game machine that inserts game balls instead of game medals and sets a bet number and plays a game.

  In the above-described embodiment, characteristic configurations of gaming machines as shown in the following (1) to (17) are also shown.

  (1) A gaming machine includes a game frame (for example, a game frame 11) installed to be openable and closable with respect to an outer frame, a predetermined plate-like body, and various components attached to the plate-like body. A game machine including a game board (for example, game board 6) including the game board, wherein the game board can be exchanged, and controls the progress of the game and transmits an effect control command for controlling electric parts for the effect. The control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) and the electric parts for the effect (for example, the LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a of the lamps) according to the effect control command transmitted by the game control means. To 282f, 283a to 283f, 882a to 882f, 884a to 884f, motors 151a and 152a) (for example, for effect control) The game control means includes command transmission means for transmitting an effect control command to the effect control means (for example, a part for executing step S29 in the game control microcomputer 560). Based on the effect control command received from the game control means, the control means outputs an output means (for example, step S708 in the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control microcomputer 100) that outputs a control signal for controlling the electric parts for effect in the serial signal system. A board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 618) provided in the game board and a frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit (for example, serial) provided in the game frame. -Further equipped with parallel conversion ICs 610-615) The board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit converts the control signal input from the output means of the production control means from the serial signal system to the parallel signal system, and among the electrical parts for production, the electrical parts provided on the game board (For example, lamp LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, motors 151a and 152a), the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit converts the control signal input from the output means of the effect control means from the serial signal system to the parallel signal. Converted into a system and output to the electrical parts provided in the game frame among the electrical parts for production (for example, lamp LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 882a to 882f, 884a to 884f) The board side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit, Or the production control means and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit are connected via a single line (for example, connected via a single line when the relay boards 606 and 607 are connected in a bus shape). The Each serial-parallel conversion IC 610 to 618 is connected to one system by being connected in a bus form or daisy chain type), and relays the connection between the panel side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit The relay board (for example, the relay board 606, 607) or the relay board (for example, the relay board 607) that relays the connection between the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the effect control means is provided. Also good. According to such a configuration, the effect control means includes an output means for outputting a control signal for controlling the electric parts for the effect in a serial signal system based on the effect control command received from the game control means, The board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit, or the effect control means and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit are configured to be connected through one line of wiring. And the number of wires between the game frames can be reduced. Therefore, in the gaming machine in which the game frame and the game board are detachable, it is possible to easily attach and detach the game frame and the game board. Also provided is a relay board for relaying the connection between the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit, or a relay board for relaying the connection between the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the effect control means. Therefore, the attachment / detachment work between the game frame and the game board can be easily performed only by performing the connection work to the relay board and the removal work.

  (2) In addition, the gaming machine is a game frame (for example, a game frame 11) installed so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a predetermined plate-like body, and various types attached to the plate-like body. A game machine including a game board (for example, game board 6) including parts and capable of exchanging the game board, and transmitting an effect control command for controlling the progress of the game and controlling electric parts for the effect Game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560), and electrical components for effects (for example, the variable display device 9, LEDs 125a to 125f and 126a to 126a to 126a) in accordance with the effect control commands transmitted by the game control means. 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 882a to 882f, 884a to 884f, motors 151a and 152a) (For example, the design control microcomputer 100a and the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b) are provided in the game board, and the effect control means includes at least one electrical component (eg, a variable display device) of the effect electrical components. 9) first presentation control means (for example, the design control microcomputer 100a) and electrical components other than the electrical parts controlled by the first presentation control means among the electrical parts for presentation (eg, each lamp) LED 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 882a to 882f, 884a to 884f, motors 151a and 152a), second effect control means (for example, sound / lamp control) And the game control means includes a first microcomputer 100b). It includes first command transmission means (for example, a part that executes step S29 in the game control microcomputer 560) that transmits the effect control command to the first effect control means, and the first effect control means includes the first effect control means. Based on the reception of the control command, second command transmission means (for example, the symbol control micro) for transmitting the second effect control command capable of specifying the content of the first effect control command to the second effect control means. And the second effect control means for controlling the electrical parts for the effect based on the second effect control command received from the first effect control means. Output means for outputting a control signal in a serial signal system (for example, a sound in the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b). Including a portion for executing Step S888), a board side serial-parallel conversion circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 618) provided in the game board and a frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit (for example, provided in the game frame) Serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615), and the board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit converts the control signal input from the output means of the second effect control means from the serial signal system to the parallel signal system, Among the electrical parts for performance, the electrical parts provided on the game board (for example, lamps LED 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, motors 151a and 152a) are output, and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit is the second effect. The control signal input from the output means of the control means is changed from the serial signal system to the parallel signal system. Then, among the electric parts for production, the electric parts provided in the game frame (for example, LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 882a to 882f, 884a to 884f of the lamp) are output. The board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit, or the effect control means and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit are connected via one system wiring (for example, the relay boards 606 and 607 are bus type). Are connected via one line of wiring. Each serial-parallel conversion IC 610 to 618 is connected to one system by being connected in a bus form or daisy chain type), and relays the connection between the panel side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit The relay board (for example, the relay board 606, 607) or the relay board (for example, the relay board 607) that relays the connection between the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the effect control means is provided. Also good. According to such a configuration, the second effect control means outputs the control signal for controlling the electric parts for effect based on the second effect control command received from the first effect control means as a serial signal. Output means for outputting in a system, so that the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit, or the effect control means and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit are connected via one system wiring Thus, the number of wires between the game board and the game frame can be reduced. Therefore, in the gaming machine in which the game frame and the game board are detachable, it is possible to easily attach and detach the game frame and the game board. Also provided is a relay board for relaying the connection between the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit, or a relay board for relaying the connection between the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the effect control means. Therefore, the attachment / detachment work between the game frame and the game board can be easily performed only by performing the connection work to the relay board and the removal work.

  (3) At least a part of the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit or the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected in series by the same system wiring (for example, each serial-parallel conversion IC 610-613 is the same system wiring). Serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 618 are connected in series with the same system wiring), and the output means are all the electrical components for production connected to the same system wiring. A panel-side serial-parallel conversion circuit or a frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit that outputs fixed-length data including control signal information in units of unit data in a serial signal system and is connected to the same system wiring The board side serial-parallel conversion circuit or the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit connected to the lower side of the same system wiring has a predetermined cycle. As well as sequential transfer control signals outputted unit data to preparative, it may be configured to output a control signal based on the unit data at a predetermined timing. According to such a configuration, the output means converts the fixed-length data including the control signal information of all the electrical components for production connected to the same system wiring into serial signals for each predetermined period of unit data. Since it is configured to output in a system, it is possible to eliminate the need to assign different address information to the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit in advance.

  (4) The game control means transmits serial data using the serial output circuit 78 in step S29 in the game control microcomputer 560, for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control means in the serial signal system. Part). According to such a configuration, since the game control means is configured to include the serial transmission means for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control means in a serial signal system, the game control means is arranged between the game control means and the effect control means. The number of wires can also be reduced.

  (5) The gaming machine has an input electric component (for example, operation buttons 81a to 81e, position sensors 151b and 152b) and a latch means for latching an input signal input from the electric component and outputting it in a parallel signal system. (For example, the D flip-flops 661 to 668 constituting the input ICs 620 and 621) and a parallel-serial conversion circuit (for example, the input ICs 620 and 621) that converts the input signal output from the latch means into a serial signal system and outputs the converted signal. And clock signal output means for outputting a clock signal used in common for the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit, the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the parallel-serial conversion circuit (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 or sound / lamp control) Clock signal output unit mounted on microcomputer 100b 56) and it may be configured to include. According to such a configuration, it is configured to include a clock signal output means for outputting a clock signal used in common for the panel side serial-parallel conversion circuit, the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit. Therefore, the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit, the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the input parallel-serial conversion circuit can be easily synchronized, and the number of clock signal lines can be reduced.

  (6) The gaming machine includes light-emitting components (for example, LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 882a to 882f, 884a to 884f) of the lamps as the electrical components for production, and the output means includes the light emitting components. As the control signal for controlling the light emission state, a signal in which the pulse amount is changed according to the luminance when the light emitting component emits light is output (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the number of pulses according to the luminance. It may be configured to output a changed signal). According to such a configuration, the output means is configured to output a signal in which the pulse amount is changed according to the luminance when the light emitting component emits light as the control signal for controlling the light emitting state of the light emitting component. Therefore, gradation control for adjusting the luminance of the light emitting component can be performed.

  (7) The gaming machine can play a predetermined game using a game ball, and variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and decorative symbols) that can identify each of them. A variable display device (for example, a special symbol display 8 or a variable display device 9) for derivation display is provided, and a specific advantageous display for a player when a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display device A gaming machine that is transitioned to a gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and is awarded to a variable winning ball device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 20) that can be changed to an open state in a specific gaming state, and a variable winning ball device. Detecting means (for example, a count switch 23) for detecting the played game ball and outputting a detection signal, and the game control means determines whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state before the display result is derived and displayed. Start of variable display of identification information and variable display on the variable display device based on the determination of the prior determination means (for example, the part for executing the processing of steps S62 and S63 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the determination of the prior determination means Variable display command transmission means for transmitting a variable display command (for example, variation pattern command) capable of specifying time (for example, a part for executing the processing of step S103 in the game control microcomputer 560), and from the detection means Winning determination means for determining whether or not a detection signal has been input (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S341 to S348, S361 to S366, and S361 in the game control microcomputer 560. In particular, the count switch input bit determination value Using steps S365 and S36 And an abnormality notification command transmission for transmitting an abnormality notification command for instructing the execution of abnormality notification based on the fact that the winning determination means inputs a detection signal in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state) Means (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S1585 and S1587 to S589 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the effect control means variably displays based on the variable display command transmitted by the variable display command transmission means. Variable display control means for starting the variable display of the identification information in the device and deriving and displaying the display result on the variable display device when the variable display time has elapsed (for example, the processing of steps S800 to S803 in the production control microcomputer 100) , The design control microcomputer 100a In step S800 to step S803, the abnormality notification means for executing abnormality notification by the effect device based on the abnormality notification command transmitted by the abnormality notification command transmission means (for example, the effect control micro) Part of the computer 100 for executing the processes of steps S1924 to S1929, S1977 to S1983, and part of the sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b for executing the processes similar to steps S1924-S1929 and S1977 to S1983). The abnormality notification means can execute abnormality notification even when the variable display control means is executing variable display of identification information in the variable display device (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that Y in step S835A). At step S83 The sound / lamp control microcomputer 100b executes step S845D when Y is executed in step S845A, and executes the same processing as step S835D when Y is executed in the same processing as step S835A. When Y is the same process, the same process as step S845D is performed), and the output means performs an effect based on the abnormality notification command transmitted by the abnormality notification command transmission means when the abnormality notification is executed by the abnormality notification means. A control signal for controlling the electrical components is output in a serial signal system (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, a part for executing step S708 based on the setting results of steps S1928 and S1983, a sound / lamp control micro In the computer 100b, the step S1928, S1983 and partial executes step S888 based on the setting result of the same process) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, the game control means transmits an abnormality notification command for instructing execution of abnormality notification based on the fact that the winning determination means inputs a detection signal in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state. Including an anomaly notification command transmitting means, wherein the effect control means includes an anomaly notifying means for executing anomaly notification by the effecting device based on the anomaly notification command transmitted by the anomaly notification command transmitting means, and the anomaly notifying means is a variable display control. Since the abnormality notification can be executed even when the means is performing variable display of the identification information on the variable display device, it is possible to notify that an abnormal winning has occurred and to continue the game. Thus, the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage.

(8) An external ground wiring that can play a predetermined game using a game ball (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) and is connected to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, gaming machine installation island 500) and grounded (For example, external connection ground, wiring 1001, wiring 2001) and a portion of the gaming machine that can be contacted by a game ball (for example, ground plate 381 of ball tank 38 shown in FIG. 39, presser fitting 732 of case cover 731, guide rod First ground wiring (for example, FG harness, wiring 1002, wiring 2004) connected to the ground plate 431, launch rail 440, outer rail 441, and inner rail 442) of 430, and record information of the recording medium owned by the player A recording medium processing device (for example, card unit 5) that performs a process of lending game balls based on (for example, balance information recorded on a prepaid card) A second ground wiring (for example, ground substrate harness, wiring 1003, 1004, 1005, wiring 2002, 2003) connectable to the external ground wiring, The grounding wire is connected to the external grounding wire via a surge absorbing element (for example, surge absorber 1100) (see FIGS. 37 to 39).
According to such a configuration, the external ground wiring connected to the outside of the gaming machine and grounded, the first ground wiring connected to the portion of the gaming machine that can contact the game ball, and the recording medium owned by the player And a second ground wiring that can be connected to a recording medium processing device that performs processing for lending game balls based on recorded information. The second ground wiring is connected to the external ground wiring, and the first ground wiring absorbs surge. Since it is connected to the external ground wiring via the element, the surge absorbing element can gradually discharge and absorb static electricity based on the charging of the game ball in the gaming machine, and electrostatic noise from the recording medium processing device side. Can be prevented from flowing from the recording medium processing apparatus side to the gaming machine side by gradually discharging and absorbing the above. Further, even when a leakage occurs on the recording medium processing apparatus side or outside the gaming machine (island), the voltage can be prevented from flowing into the gaming machine side.

(9) In addition to the external ground wiring, the recording medium processing apparatus uses a second external ground wiring connected to the outside of the gaming machine and grounded (for example, wiring 2000 through the power outlet of the card unit 50 shown in FIG. 39). You may have.
According to such a configuration, when the recording medium processing apparatus includes the second external ground wiring that is connected to the outside of the gaming machine and grounded separately from the external ground wiring, the external ground wiring is connected. Even if not, the gaming machine main body and the recording medium processing apparatus can be grounded.

(10) The voltage used in the recording medium processing apparatus is higher than the voltage used in the gaming machine, and the operation start voltage of the surge absorbing element is higher than the voltage used in the gaming machine and higher than the voltage used in the recording medium processing apparatus. (For example, it may be higher than the operating voltage DC5V of the microcomputer in the gaming machine and lower than the operating voltage AC24V of the card unit 50).
According to such a configuration, the voltage used in the recording medium processing apparatus is higher than the voltage used in the gaming machine, and the operation start voltage of the surge absorbing element is higher than the voltage used in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voltage caused by the leakage from the recording medium processing apparatus side from reliably flowing into the gaming machine side.

(11) A game ball tank (for example, a ball tank 38) capable of storing game balls used for games, a sound output device (for example, speaker 27, speaker unit 27a) capable of outputting sound, and a sound output device are attached. A sound output device is attached so that at least a part of the device main body (for example, the rear portion) protrudes from the back surface of the game frame. The ball tank is disposed on the back side (for example, the back side) of the game frame, and a notch portion (for example, the notch recess 38a) is formed on a part of the outside surface (for example, the front side plate 38b) facing the back side of the game frame. Is formed on the back side of the game frame as a device main body (for example, the speaker unit 27a) of the sound output device attached to the or as a mounting portion (for example, the speaker mounting hole 115) of the sound output device in the game frame. At least a portion of the protruding portion (e.g., bulge portion 121), the outer surface of the notch may be configured to be positioned so as to abut or close.
According to such a configuration, the sound output device is attached such that at least a part of the device main body protrudes from the back surface of the game frame, the game ball tank is disposed on the back surface side of the game frame, and the back surface of the game frame. A notch is formed in a part of the outer surface opposite to the device main body of the sound output device attached to the game frame or the protrusion formed on the back side of the game frame as the attachment portion of the sound output device in the game frame. Since the outer surface of the cutout portion is arranged to be in contact with or close to at least a part, the sound output device is placed in the cutout portion formed in a part of the outer surface facing the back surface of the game frame in the game ball tank. Since it can be arranged so as to accommodate a part, even if the sound output device is enlarged, the game ball without reducing the storage amount of the ball and without greatly projecting to the back side of the game frame Arrange the tank Can, thereby avoiding the interference or the like between the various devices provided in the gaming machine installing island. In addition, the vibration generated when the sound is output from the sound output device is easily transmitted, and the balls stored in the game ball tank are leveled by the vibration and are less likely to be biased. Occurrence is prevented.

(12) A gaming machine that pays out a game ball based on the fact that a payout condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has won a prize-winning slot 29, 30, 33, 39, or a big prize-winning slot). A payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out a ball, and a storage portion (for example, a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3) provided on the front side of the gaming machine and capable of storing the game balls paid out by the payout means , Surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4) and abnormality detecting means for detecting that a predetermined abnormal state has occurred in the gaming machine (for example, steps S611, S652, S656, S660, S664 in the production control microcomputer 100). A part for executing S673, a part for executing steps S1588 and S1593 in the game control microcomputer 560), and a predetermined abnormality state by the abnormality detection means. An abnormality notification means (for example, a portion for executing S707 in the production control microcomputer 100) that performs abnormality notification when a stagnation is detected, and the storage unit includes a light emitter (for example, an upper plate lamp, a lower plate). Lamp), and the abnormality notification means is a light emitter provided on the outer side surface among the light emitters provided in the reservoir (for example, LEDs 882a, 882b, 882e, and 882f on the left side surface and the right side surface of the upper plate lamp). (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S1928 and S1983, thereby performing LED 882a, 882b, 882e on the left side surface and the right side surface of the upper plate lamp. 882f may blink to notify an abnormal winning).
According to such a configuration, a payout means for paying out the game balls, a storage portion provided on the front side of the gaming machine and capable of storing the game balls paid out by the payout means, and a predetermined abnormal state in the gaming machine An abnormality detecting means for detecting that an abnormality has occurred; and an abnormality notifying means for executing an abnormality notification when a predetermined abnormal state is detected by the abnormality detecting means; Is configured to perform abnormality notification by controlling the light emission state of the light emitter provided on the outer side surface among the light emitters provided in the storage portion. By using it, abnormality notification can be performed in a manner that is not easily noticed by fraudsters. In addition, since the game store clerk in the game store can see the light emitter on the outer side surface of the storage unit, the game store clerk can easily recognize abnormal states such as various errors and frauds. In addition, since the abnormality notification can be performed by using the light emitter of the storage unit used for normal game effects, it is not necessary to provide a special device for performing the abnormality notification, and an increase in cost for performing the abnormality notification is prevented. Can do.

(13) The abnormality detecting means detects that the storage unit (for example, the surplus ball receiving tray (lower plate) 4) is in a full tank state in which a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored (for example, production) The control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of S652), and the abnormality notification unit detects a predetermined light emitter provided in the storage unit when the abnormality detection unit detects that the storage unit is full. By controlling the light emission state of the storage unit, an abnormality notification of the full state of the storage unit is executed (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 blinks the LEDs 884a to 884f of the lower plate lamps by executing steps S1941 and S1998). To notify the abnormal winning).
According to such a configuration, the abnormality detection unit detects that the storage unit has reached a full tank state in which a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored, and the abnormality notification unit stores the abnormality by the abnormality detection unit. When it is detected that the unit is full, the abnormal state notification of the full state of the storage unit is performed by controlling the light emission state of a predetermined light emitter provided in the storage unit. Therefore, a full state can be notified without interrupting a game effect (for example, an effect during a big hit) by a speaker or a variable display device.

(14) An effect device including an effect display device (for example, variable display device 9) for performing a predetermined effect, an effect control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling the effect device, and a player operating An effect operation means that is operated when the player is involved in a game effect (for example, an effect mode selection display in FIG. 33, a reach effect display in FIGS. 34, 35, 36, etc.) For example, the lending request includes an operation unit 81) and a push button member (for example, push button member 910) that can be pressed by the player, and is operated when the player makes a lending request for a game ball to the recording medium processing device. Operation means (for example, ball lending switch 91), the effect operation means includes a rotation operation member (for example, rotation operation unit 812) that can be rotated by the player, and the effect control means includes a rotation operation unit. In response to the rotation operation of the display, a display (for example, the display of (c), (d) of FIG. 33, (c), (d) of FIG. Rotation operation participation effect control means (for example, the portion for executing S675, S753, and S755 in the effect control microcomputer 100) that performs rotation operation participation effect display, and each of the effect operation means and the lending request operation means. May be provided so as to be operable on an operation surface (for example, the operation surface 93) formed of substantially the same surface, and the lending request operation means may be provided so that the push button member can be operated at a position recessed from the operation surface. (See FIG. 11).
According to such a configuration, it includes means that can be operated by the player, and includes an effect operating means that is operated when the player is involved in the effect of the game, and a push button member that can be operated by the player. A lending request operating means that is operated when a player makes a lending request for a game ball to the recording medium processing apparatus, the effect operating means includes a rotation operation member that can be rotated by the player, and the effect control means includes: Rotation operation participation effect control means for performing rotation operation participation effect display means for performing display that causes the rotation operation to be related to the effect of the game performed by the effect display device according to the rotation operation of the rotation operation member, Each of the request operation means is provided so as to be operable on an operation surface consisting of substantially the same surface, and the lending request operation means is provided such that the push button member can be operated at a position recessed from the operation surface. That. According to such a configuration, in accordance with the rotation operation of the rotation operation means by the player, the rotation operation participation effect that causes the rotation operation to be related to the game effect performed by the effect display device is executed. It is possible to provide a player with a new game sensation based on a new operation sensation that is involved in the production of the game, and to improve the fun of the game based on the player's operation. Each of the effect operation means and the lending request operation means is provided so as to be operable on an operation surface consisting of substantially the same surface, but for the lending request operation means, the push button member is in a position recessed from the operation surface. Since it is provided so as to be operable, it is difficult for the player to touch the lending request operating means when operating the effect operating means. This prevents the player from touching the lending request operating means and operating the lending request operating means by mistake when operating the effect operating means. It is possible to prevent gaming balls from being lent unintentionally. Further, since it becomes difficult for the player to contact the lending request operating means when operating the effect operating means, it is possible to prevent the lending request operating means from interfering with the operation when operating the effect operating means. .

(15) A game board (for example, a game frame 11) installed so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, and a predetermined board and various parts attached to the board. For example, a gaming machine provided with a gaming board 6) in which the gaming board can be exchanged, and the production control means is an electrical component for production (for example, a variable display device 9, a speaker 27, Output means for outputting control signals for controlling the LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 882a to 882f, 82A, 884a to 884f) of each lamp in a serial signal system ( For example, a board-side serial-parallel board provided in the game board includes a part for executing step S708 in the production control microcomputer 100). It further includes a conversion circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 616 to 619) and a frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit (for example, serial-parallel conversion ICs 610 to 615, 622, 623) provided in the game frame. The parallel conversion circuit converts the control signal input from the output means of the production control means from the serial signal system to the parallel signal system, and converts the control signal converted into the parallel signal system to the game board among the electrical components for the production. Output to the provided electrical components (for example, lamp LEDs 125a to 125f, 126a to 126f, motors 151a and 152a), and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit serializes the control signal input from the output means of the effect control means Converted from signal system to parallel signal system, converted to parallel signal system The control signal is output to an electrical component provided in the game frame among the electrical components for production (for example, lamp LEDs 281a to 281l, 282a to 282f, 283a to 283f, 882a to 882f, 82A, 884a to 884f) The board-side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit, or the production control means and the frame-side serial-parallel conversion circuit are connected via one system wiring (for example, the relay boards 606 and 607). Are connected to each other through a single wiring system, and each serial-parallel conversion IC 611 to 619, 622, 623 is connected to a single system by connecting to a bus type or a daisy chain type. The connection between the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit A relay board (for example, the relay board 607) that relays connection between the relay board (for example, the relay boards 606 and 607) or the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the effect control means may be provided.
According to such a configuration, the production control means includes the output means for outputting a control signal for controlling the electrical parts for production in a serial signal system, and the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel Since the conversion circuit or the production control means and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit are configured to be connected through one line of wiring, the number of wires between the game board and the game frame can be reduced. Can do. Therefore, in the gaming machine in which the game frame and the game board are detachable, it is possible to easily attach and detach the game frame and the game board. Also provided is a relay board for relaying the connection between the board side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit, or a relay board for relaying the connection between the frame side serial-parallel conversion circuit and the effect control means. Therefore, the attachment / detachment work between the game frame and the game board can be easily performed only by performing the connection work to the relay board and the removal work.

(16) A plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be identified based on the winning of a game ball in a first start area (for example, the second start winning opening 14) provided in the game area. And an effect display device (for example, the variable display device 9) for derivation and display of the display result, which is advantageous for the player when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the effect display device. An effect control means (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100) that controls an effect device including an effect display device, and a first start The game area can be changed between a closed state (for example, a closed state) in which no game ball is won and an open state (for example, an open state) in which a game ball can be won in the first start area. A variable winning device (for example, variable winning ball device 15) that is opened based on the winning of a game ball in the starting area (for example, gate 32) and a gaming ball that has won the first starting area are detected. Detecting means for outputting a detection signal (for example, the second start port switch 14a), and opening / closing determining means for determining the open / closed state of the variable winning device (for example, a part for executing step S1590 in the game control microcomputer 560); When the open / close determining means determines that the variable winning device is in the closed state, the winning abnormality notification means for performing the winning abnormality notification by the effect device based on the detection of the winning of the game ball by the detecting means. (For example, the part for executing steps S1590 to S1594 in the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microphone And a portion of the computer 100 that executes step S707), and the winning abnormality notifying means can execute the winning abnormality notification even when the variable display of the identification information is being executed in the effect display device. Good.
According to such a configuration, when the variable winning device is determined to be in the closed state by the open / close determining means, the effect device notifies the winning abnormality notification based on the detection of the winning of the game ball by the detecting means. A prize abnormality notifying means for executing the award, and the prize abnormality notifying means can execute a prize abnormality notification even when the identification display information is being variably displayed on the effect display device. It is possible to notify that a winning abnormality has occurred, and as a result, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the variable winning device. In addition, since the game can be continued even when the winning abnormality is notified, the player is not disadvantaged even when the notification is made due to a malfunction.

(17) A special variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 20) that can change from a state in which a game ball does not win in a specific gaming state to a state where it is easy to win, and a gaming ball that has won the special variable winning device are detected. A winning detection means for outputting a detection signal (for example, the count switch 23) and a winning determination means for determining whether or not the detection signal from the winning detection means has been input (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, step S331). To S338, S351 to S361; in particular, a portion to execute the processes of steps S355 and S361 using the count switch input bit determination value) and the winning abnormality notifying means are game states other than the specific gaming state. Based on the input of the detection signal by the winning determination means, the effect device notifies the winning abnormality notification That (for example, portions for performing the steps S1585~S1589 in the gaming control microcomputer 560, part executes step S707 in effect control microcomputer 100) may be configured so.
According to such a configuration, since the winning abnormality notification means performs the winning abnormality notification by the effect device based on the fact that the winning determination means inputs the detection signal in a gaming state other than the specific gaming state, a special variable winning is achieved. It is possible to notify that a prize abnormality has occurred due to an illegal act on the device, and as a result, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act on the special variable prize device. In addition, since the game can be continued even when the winning abnormality is notified, the player is not disadvantaged even when the notification is made due to a malfunction.

  The present invention allows a player to play a predetermined game using a game medium, a game frame installed to be openable and closable with respect to an outer frame, a predetermined plate-like body attached to the game frame, The present invention is applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine provided with a gaming board including various parts attached to a plate-like body.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Special symbol display 9 Variable display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 20 Special variable winning ball apparatus 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control 910 Power supply board 1000 Earth board 1100 Surge absorber

Claims (1)

A variable display of a plurality of types of first identification information that can be identified based on the detection of the game ball by the specific start detection means that detects the game ball that has passed through the first start area provided in the game area. First variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result, and variably displaying the second identification information based on the fact that the game ball has passed the second starting area provided in the game area, and deriving and displaying the display result And a second variable display means, wherein when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display means, the gaming machine shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
A variable winning device that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball does not pass through the first starting area and an open state in which the game ball can pass;
Variable winning device control means for controlling the variable winning device to an open state when a predetermined display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display means;
When a game ball is detected by the specific start detection means in a period other than the period in which the variable winning device is in the open state or a predetermined time elapses from the time when the variable winning device is changed from the open state to the closed state. First abnormality determining means for determining abnormality;
Variable display time setting means for setting a variable display time of the second identification information;
A state in which the variable display time of the second identification information is shortened, a state in which the predetermined display result is more easily derived and displayed on the second variable display means than in a normal state, or a time in which the variable winning device is opened Advantageous state control means for controlling to at least one advantageous state of a state that is longer than the state;
A special variable winning device capable of changing from a state in which the game ball does not win in the specific gaming state to a state in which it is easy to win,
Special winning detection means for detecting a game ball won in the special variable winning device;
Second abnormality determination means for determining an abnormality when a game ball is detected by the special winning detection means in a period other than the period controlled in the specific gaming state;
An abnormality notification means for notifying abnormality when at least determined as abnormal by the second abnormality determination means;
The game machine, wherein the variable display time setting means sets the variable display time in a case where the variable display time is controlled to be in the advantageous state with respect to the predetermined time.